Brother MFC 9320CW User Manual
USER’S GUIDE  
MFC-9120CN  
MFC-9320CW  
Version 0  
ARL/ASA/NZ  
Approval Information and Compilation and  
Publication Notice  
THIS EQUIPMENT IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH A TWO WIRE ANALOGUE PSTN LINE  
FITTED WITH THE APPROPRIATE CONNECTOR.  
APPROVAL INFORMATION  
Brother advises that this product may not function correctly in a country other than where it was  
originally purchased, and does not offer any warranty in the event that this product is used on  
public telecommunication lines in other countries.  
Compilation and Publication Notice  
Under the supervision of Brother Industries Ltd., this manual has been compiled and published,  
covering the latest product descriptions and specifications.  
The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without  
notice.  
Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications and materials  
contained herein and shall not be responsible for any damages (including consequential) caused  
by reliance on the materials presented, including but not limited to typographical and other errors  
relating to the publication.  
i
Table of Contents  
Section I General  
1
General information  
2
Using the documentation.......................................................................................2  
Symbols and conventions used in the documentation ....................................2  
Accessing the Software User’s Guide and Network User’s Guide ........................3  
Viewing documentation ...................................................................................3  
Accessing Brother Support (For Windows®) .........................................................5  
Control panel overview ..........................................................................................6  
Data LED indications .....................................................................................10  
2
Loading paper and documents  
11  
Loading paper and print media............................................................................11  
Loading paper in the standard paper tray......................................................11  
Loading paper in the manual feed slot ..........................................................12  
Unprintable area ............................................................................................16  
Acceptable paper and other print media..............................................................17  
Type and size of paper..................................................................................17  
Handling and using special paper .................................................................19  
Loading documents .............................................................................................22  
Using the automatic document feeder (ADF) ................................................22  
Using the scanner glass (Flatbed).................................................................23  
3
General Setup  
24  
Mode Timer..........................................................................................................24  
Paper settings......................................................................................................24  
Paper Type....................................................................................................24  
Paper Size.....................................................................................................24  
Volume settings ...................................................................................................25  
Ring volume...................................................................................................25  
Beeper volume ..............................................................................................25  
Speaker volume.............................................................................................25  
Set Daylight Saving Time ....................................................................................26  
Ecology features..................................................................................................26  
Toner Save....................................................................................................26  
Sleep Time ....................................................................................................26  
LCD Contrast.......................................................................................................27  
Dial Prefix ............................................................................................................27  
Setting up the prefix number .........................................................................27  
Changing the prefix number ..........................................................................28  
ii  
4
Security features  
29  
Secure Function Lock 2.0 (MFC-9320CW only)..................................................29  
Setting the password for the administrator ...................................................29  
Changing the password for the administrator................................................30  
Setting up the public user mode....................................................................30  
Setting up restricted users.............................................................................31  
Turning Secure Function Lock on/off.............................................................31  
Switching Users.............................................................................................32  
Memory Security (MFC-9120CN only).................................................................32  
Setting up the password ...............................................................................33  
Changing your memory security password ...................................................33  
Turning memory security on/off.....................................................................33  
Setting Lock.........................................................................................................34  
Setting up the password................................................................................34  
Changing your Setting Lock password..........................................................34  
Turning Setting Lock on/off............................................................................34  
Restricting dialling................................................................................................35  
Dial pad restriction.........................................................................................35  
One Touch restriction ....................................................................................35  
Speed Dial restriction ....................................................................................35  
Section II Fax  
5
Sending a fax  
38  
How to fax............................................................................................................38  
Entering fax mode .........................................................................................38  
Sending a fax from the ADF ..........................................................................38  
Sending a fax from the scanner glass ...........................................................38  
Faxing Letter size document from the scanner glass....................................39  
Cancelling a fax in progress ..........................................................................39  
Broadcasting (black & white only)........................................................................39  
Cancelling a Broadcast in progress...............................................................40  
Additional sending operations..............................................................................40  
Sending faxes using multiple settings ...........................................................40  
Electronic cover page (black & white only)....................................................41  
Contrast.........................................................................................................42  
Changing Fax Resolution ..............................................................................42  
Dual access (black & white only)...................................................................43  
Real Time Transmission................................................................................43  
Overseas Mode .............................................................................................44  
Delayed Fax (black & white only) ..................................................................44  
Delayed batch transmission (black & white only) ..........................................44  
Checking and cancelling waiting jobs............................................................45  
Sending a fax manually .................................................................................45  
Out of memory message ...............................................................................45  
iii  
6
Receiving a fax  
46  
Receive modes....................................................................................................46  
Choosing the receive mode...........................................................................46  
Using receive modes ...........................................................................................47  
Fax Only ........................................................................................................47  
Fax/Tel...........................................................................................................47  
Manual...........................................................................................................47  
External TAD .................................................................................................47  
Receive Mode settings ........................................................................................48  
Ring Delay .....................................................................................................48  
F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)...............................................................48  
Fax Detect .....................................................................................................49  
Setting the Print Density ................................................................................49  
Additional receiving operations............................................................................50  
Printing a reduced incoming fax ....................................................................50  
Setting the Fax Receive Stamp (black & white only).....................................50  
Receiving faxes into memory (black & white only) ........................................50  
Printing a fax from the memory .....................................................................51  
Out of Paper Reception (black & white only).................................................51  
7
Telephone and external devices  
52  
Telephone line services.......................................................................................52  
Do you have Voice Mail?...............................................................................52  
Telephone Service for Australia...........................................................................52  
Telstra® FaxStream® Duet® (Distinctive Ringing) .........................................52  
Telephone Service for New Zealand ...................................................................54  
FaxAbility .......................................................................................................54  
Telephone Service for Some Countries...............................................................56  
Distinctive Ringing (For Singapore and Hong Kong).....................................56  
Caller ID (not available in India) ....................................................................57  
Connecting an external TAD ...............................................................................58  
Connections...................................................................................................59  
Recording an outgoing message (OGM).......................................................59  
Multi-line connections (PABX).......................................................................59  
External and extension telephones......................................................................60  
Operation from external or extension telephones .........................................60  
For Fax/Tel mode only...................................................................................60  
Connecting an external or extension telephone ............................................60  
Using a non-Brother cordless external handset ............................................61  
Using Remote Codes ....................................................................................61  
iv  
8
Dialling and storing numbers  
63  
How to dial...........................................................................................................63  
Manual dialling...............................................................................................63  
One touch Dialling .........................................................................................63  
Speed dialling................................................................................................63  
Search ...........................................................................................................63  
Fax redial.......................................................................................................64  
Storing numbers ..................................................................................................64  
Storing a pause .............................................................................................64  
Storing One Touch Dial numbers ..................................................................65  
Storing Speed Dial numbers..........................................................................66  
Changing One Touch and Speed Dial numbers............................................68  
Setting up Groups for Broadcasting ..............................................................69  
Combining quick dial numbers ......................................................................71  
Tone or Pulse (not available in New Zealand)...............................................71  
9
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)  
72  
Fax Forwarding....................................................................................................72  
Fax Storage .........................................................................................................73  
PC Fax Receive...................................................................................................73  
Changing Remote Fax Options ...........................................................................74  
Turning off Remote Fax Options ...................................................................75  
Remote retrieval ..................................................................................................75  
Setting a Remote Access Code.....................................................................75  
Using your Remote Access Code..................................................................76  
Retrieving fax messages ...............................................................................76  
Changing the Fax Forwarding number..........................................................77  
Remote fax commands........................................................................................78  
10  
11  
Polling  
79  
Polling receive .....................................................................................................79  
Secure polling................................................................................................79  
Delayed polling..............................................................................................79  
Sequential polling ..........................................................................................80  
Polled transmit (black & white only).....................................................................80  
Setup for polled transmit................................................................................80  
Setup for polled transmit with a secure code.................................................81  
Printing reports  
82  
Fax reports...........................................................................................................82  
Transmission verification report.....................................................................82  
Fax Journal....................................................................................................83  
Reports ................................................................................................................83  
How to print a report......................................................................................84  
v
Section III Copy  
12  
Making copies  
86  
How to copy.........................................................................................................86  
Entering copy mode.......................................................................................86  
Making a single copy .....................................................................................86  
Making multiple copies ..................................................................................86  
Stop copying..................................................................................................86  
Copy options (temporary settings).......................................................................87  
Enlarging or reducing the image copied........................................................87  
Using the Options key ...................................................................................88  
Improving copy quality...................................................................................89  
Sorting copies using the ADF ........................................................................89  
Adjusting Contrast, Colour and Brightness....................................................89  
Making N in 1 copies (page layout) ...............................................................90  
Out of memory message .....................................................................................92  
Section IV Direct printing  
13  
Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9320CW only)  
94  
Before using PictBridge .......................................................................................94  
PictBridge requirements ................................................................................94  
Using PictBridge ..................................................................................................94  
Setting your digital camera ............................................................................94  
Printing images....................................................................................................95  
DPOF printing................................................................................................96  
Printing images with Secure Function Lock 2.0 enabled  
(MFC-9320CW only).........................................................................................96  
Connecting a camera as a storage device ..........................................................98  
Understanding the error messages .....................................................................98  
14  
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
99  
Supported file formats..........................................................................................99  
Creating a PRN or PostScript® 3™ file for direct printing....................................99  
Printing data directly from the USB Flash memory drive  
(MFC-9320CW only).......................................................................................100  
Printing data directly from the USB flash memory drive with Secure  
Function Lock 2.0 enabled (MFC-9320CW only)............................................101  
Understanding the error messages ...................................................................103  
vi  
Section V Software  
15  
Software and Network features  
106  
How to read the HTML User’s Guide.................................................................106  
Windows®....................................................................................................106  
Macintosh ....................................................................................................106  
Section VI Appendixes  
A
Safety and legal  
108  
Choosing a location ...........................................................................................108  
To use the machine safely.................................................................................109  
Disconnect device .......................................................................................113  
LAN connection ...........................................................................................113  
Radio interference .......................................................................................113  
International ENERGY STAR® Qualification Statement..............................113  
Important Information for Australia ....................................................................114  
IMPORTANT-For Your Safety.....................................................................114  
Important Safety Instructions.......................................................................114  
Important Information for New Zealand .............................................................115  
IMPORTANT-For Your Safety.....................................................................115  
Important Safety Instructions.......................................................................115  
IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................118  
Important Information for Some Countries.........................................................119  
Important Safety Instructions.......................................................................119  
Libtiff Copyright and License .............................................................................121  
Legal limitations for copying ..............................................................................121  
Trademarks........................................................................................................122  
B
Options  
123  
Memory board....................................................................................................123  
Installing extra memory ...............................................................................123  
vii  
C
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
125  
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................125  
If you are having difficulty with your machine ..............................................125  
Improving the print quality ...........................................................................134  
Setting Dial Tone detection .........................................................................141  
Telephone line interference.........................................................................141  
Error and maintenance messages.....................................................................142  
Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal report .............................................148  
Document jams............................................................................................149  
Paper jams ..................................................................................................150  
Routine maintenance.........................................................................................155  
Cleaning the outside of the machine ...........................................................155  
Cleaning the scanner glass .........................................................................156  
Cleaning the LED heads..............................................................................157  
Cleaning the corona wires...........................................................................158  
Cleaning the drum unit ................................................................................159  
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers...............................................................164  
Calibration ...................................................................................................164  
Auto Registration.........................................................................................165  
Manual Registration.....................................................................................165  
Replacing the consumable items.......................................................................166  
Replacing a Toner cartridge ........................................................................168  
Drum units ...................................................................................................173  
Replacing the belt unit .................................................................................177  
Replacing the waste toner box ....................................................................181  
Replacing periodic maintenance parts...............................................................186  
Machine Information ..........................................................................................187  
Checking the Serial Number........................................................................187  
Checking the Page Counters.......................................................................187  
Checking the remaining life of parts ............................................................187  
Reset Functions...........................................................................................187  
How to reset the machine............................................................................188  
Packing and shipping the machine....................................................................188  
D
Menu and features  
193  
On-screen programming....................................................................................193  
Menu table...................................................................................................193  
Memory storage...........................................................................................193  
Menu keys .........................................................................................................193  
How to access the menu mode ...................................................................194  
Menu table.........................................................................................................195  
Entering text.......................................................................................................213  
viii  
E
Specifications  
215  
General..............................................................................................................215  
Print media.........................................................................................................217  
Fax.....................................................................................................................218  
Copy ..................................................................................................................219  
Scan ..................................................................................................................220  
Print ...................................................................................................................221  
Interfaces...........................................................................................................222  
PictBridge (MFC-9320CW)................................................................................223  
Direct Print feature (MFC-9320CW) ..................................................................224  
Computer requirements.....................................................................................225  
Consumable items.............................................................................................226  
Ethernet wired network......................................................................................227  
Ethernet wireless network (MFC-9320CW only)................................................229  
Authentication and encryption for wireless users only.................................231  
Wireless one-push configuration .................................................................233  
F
Glossary  
Index  
234  
238  
G
ix  
x
Section I  
General  
I
General information  
Loading paper and documents  
General Setup  
2
11  
24  
29  
Security features  
 
General information  
1
1
Using the  
documentation  
WARNING  
1
Warnings tell you what to do to prevent  
possible personal injury.  
Thank you for buying a Brother machine!  
Reading the documentation will help you  
make the most of your machine.  
CAUTION  
Cautions specify procedures you must  
follow or avoid to prevent possible minor  
injuries.  
Symbols and conventions  
used in the documentation  
1
IMPORTANT  
The following symbols and conventions are  
used throughout the documentation.  
IMPORTANT describes procedures you  
must follow or avoid to prevent possible  
machine problems or damage to other  
objects.  
Bold  
Bold style identifies keys on the  
machine control panel or  
computer screen.  
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to a  
possible electrical shock.  
Italics  
Italicized style emphasizes an  
important point or refers you to  
a related topic.  
Hot Surface icons warn you not to  
touch machine parts that are hot.  
Courier Courier New font identifies the  
Notes tell you how you should  
New  
messages shown on the LCD  
of the machine.  
respond to a situation that may arise  
or give tips about how the current  
operation works with other features.  
2
     
General information  
c If the model name screen appears, click  
your model name. The CD-ROM main  
menu will appear.  
Accessing the  
Software User’s Guide  
and Network User’s  
Guide  
1
1
This User’s Guide does not contain all the  
information about the machine such as how  
to use the advanced features of Fax, Printer,  
Scanner, PC Fax and Network. When you are  
ready to learn detailed information about  
these operations, read the Software User’s  
Guide and Network User’s Guide.  
If this window does not appear, use  
Windows® Explorer to find and run the  
start.exe program from the root directory  
of the Brother CD-ROM.  
Viewing documentation  
1
Viewing documentation (Windows®)  
1
d Click Documentation.  
To view the documentation, from the Start  
menu, point to Brother, MFC-XXXX (where  
XXXX is your model name) from the program  
group, and then click User’s Guides in  
HTML format.  
e Click the documentation you want to  
read:  
„ HTML documents (2 manuals):  
Software User’s Guide and  
Network User’s Guide in HTML  
format.  
If you have not installed the software, you can  
find the documentation by following the  
instructions below:  
This format is recommended for  
viewing on your computer.  
a Turn on your PC.  
„ PDF documents (4 manuals):  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM labelled  
User’s Guide for stand-alone  
operations, Software User’s Guide,  
Network User’s Guide and Quick  
Setup Guide.  
Windows® into your CD-ROM drive.  
b If the language selection screen  
appears, click your language.  
This format is recommended for  
printing the manuals. Click to go to  
the Brother Solutions Center, where  
you can view or download the PDF  
documents. (Internet access and  
PDF Reader software are required.)  
3
     
Chapter 1  
How to find scanning instructions  
1
Viewing documentation (Macintosh)  
1
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
a Turn on your Macintosh.  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM labelled  
Macintosh into your CD-ROM drive.  
b The following window will appear.  
Software User’s Guide:  
1
„ Scanning a document using the TWAIN  
driver in Chapter 2  
„ Scanning a document using the WIA  
driver (Windows® XP/Windows Vista®) in  
Chapter 2  
„ Using ControlCenter3 in Chapter 3  
„ Network Scanning in Chapter 12  
ScanSoft™ PaperPort™ 11SE with  
OCR How-to-Guides:  
1
c Double-click the Documentation icon.  
d Double-click your language folder.  
„ The complete ScanSoft™  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
How-to-Guides can be viewed from the  
Help selection in the ScanSoft™  
PaperPort™ 11SE application.  
e Double-click top.html to view the  
Software User’s Guide and Network  
User’s Guide in HTML format.  
f Click the documentation you want to  
How to find Network setup  
instructions  
read.  
1
„ Software User’s Guide  
„ Network User’s Guide  
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
or AOSS™, follow the steps in the Quick  
Setup Guide. For more information about  
network setup please see the Network User's  
Guide.  
Note  
The documents are also available in PDF  
format (4 manuals): User’s Guide for  
stand-alone operations, Software User’s  
Guide, Network User’s Guide and  
Quick Setup Guide. The PDF format is  
recommended for printing the manuals.  
Double-click Brother Solutions Center  
icon to go to the Brother Solutions Center,  
where you can view or download the PDF  
documents. (Internet access and PDF  
Reader software are required.)  
4
General information  
How to find scanning instructions  
1
Accessing Brother  
There are several ways you can scan  
documents. You can find the instructions as  
follows:  
Support  
1
(For Windows®)  
1
Software User’s Guide:  
1
You can find all the contacts you will need,  
such as Web support (Brother Solutions  
Center) and on the Brother CD-ROM.  
„ Scanning in Chapter 8  
„ Using ControlCenter2 in Chapter 9  
„ Network Scanning in Chapter 12  
„ Click Brother Support on the main menu.  
The following screen will appear:  
Presto! PageManager User’s Guide:  
1
„ The complete Presto! PageManager  
User’s Guide can be viewed from the Help  
selection in the Presto! PageManager  
application.  
How to find Network setup  
instructions  
1
Your machine can be connected to a wireless  
or wired network. You can find basic setup  
instructions in the Quick Setup Guide. If your  
wireless access point supports  
„ To access our website  
(http://www.brother.com/), click  
Brother Home Page.  
SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup  
or AOSS™, follow the steps in the Quick  
Setup Guide. For more information about  
network setup please see the Network User's  
Guide.  
„ For the latest news and product support  
information  
(http://solutions.brother.com/), click  
Brother Solutions Center.  
„ To visit our website for original Brother  
Supplies  
(http://www.brother.com/original/), click  
Supplies Information.  
„ To return to the main page, click Back or  
if you have finished, click Exit.  
5
 
Chapter 1  
Control panel overview  
1
MFC-9120CN and MFC-9320CW have similar keys.  
1
2
3 4  
5
6
01/07 15:30 Fax  
Res:Standard  
11  
10  
1
2
3 4  
5
6
01/07 15:30 Fax  
Res:Standard  
11  
10  
6
 
General information  
1
3 4  
5
6
7
8
01/07 15:30 Fax  
Res:Standard  
11  
10  
9
8
3 4  
5
6
7
01/07 15:30 Fax  
Res:Standard  
11  
10  
9
7
Chapter 1  
1
2
One Touch keys  
(MFC-9320CW) When using Secure Function  
Lock, you can switch restricted users by  
holding down Shift as you press Secure. (See  
Secure Function Lock 2.0 (MFC-9320CW only)  
on page 29.)  
These 4 keys give you instant access to 8  
previously stored numbers.  
Shift  
Lets you access One Touch numbers 5 to 8  
when held down.  
Job Cancel  
Cancels a programmed print job and clears it  
from the machine’s memory. To cancel  
multiple print jobs, hold down this key until the  
LCD shows Job Cancel (All).  
Fax, Copy and Print keys  
Fax keys:  
Hook  
Press before dialing if you want to make sure a  
fax machine will answer, and then press Start.  
Also, press this key after you pick up the  
handset of an external telephone during the  
F/T ring (fast double-rings).  
3
4
5
Data LED  
The LED will flash depending on the machine  
status.  
Error LED  
Blinks in orange when the LCD displays an  
error or an important status message.  
Redial/Pause  
Redials the last number called. It also inserts a  
pause when programming quick dial numbers  
or when dialling a number manually.  
LCD  
Displays messages to help you set up and use  
your machine.  
Resolution  
Sets the resolution when sending a fax.  
(MFC-9320CW only) A four level indicator  
shows the current wireless signal strength if  
you are using a wireless connection.  
Copy keys:  
Options  
You can quickly and easily choose temporary  
settings for copying.  
0
Max  
Enlarge/Reduce  
Reduces or enlarges copies.  
Quality  
6
Clear/Back  
Deletes entered data or lets you cancel the  
current setting.  
Lets you change the quality for the next copy.  
OK  
Lets you store your settings in the machine.  
Print keys:  
Volume keys:  
Direct (MFC-9320CW)  
Lets you print data from a USB flash memory  
drive or PictBridge compatible camera directly  
to the machine.  
d or c  
Press to scroll backwards or forwards through  
menu selections. Press to change the volume  
when in fax or standby mode.  
(See Printing photos from a digital camera  
(MFC-9320CW only) on page 94.)  
a or b  
Reports (MFC-9120CN)  
Press to scroll through the menus and options.  
Print the Transmission Verification Reports,  
Help List, Tel Index List, Fax Journal, User  
Settings and Network Config.  
Address Book:  
Lets you look up numbers that are stored in the  
dialling memory. It also allows you to dial  
stored numbers by pressing a three digit  
number.  
Secure  
You can print data saved in the memory when  
you enter your four-digit password. (For details  
about using the Secure key, see the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
8
           
General information  
7
Dial pad  
Use these keys to dial telephone and fax  
numbers and as a keyboard for entering  
information into the machine.  
1
The # key temporarily switches the dialling  
mode from Pulse to Tone during a telephone  
call (not available in New Zealand).  
8
9
Stop/Exit  
Stops an operation or exits from a menu.  
Start:  
Colour  
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies  
in full colour.  
Mono  
Lets you start sending faxes or making copies  
in black and white.  
10 Mode keys:  
Fax  
Puts the machine in Fax mode.  
Scan  
Puts the machine in Scan mode.  
(For details about scanning, see the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
Copy  
Puts the machine in Copy mode.  
11 Menu  
Lets you access the Menu to program your  
settings in this machine.  
9
 
Chapter 1  
Data LED indications  
1
The Data LED (light emitting diode) will flash depending on the machine’s status.  
LED  
Machine Status  
Description  
Ready Mode  
The machine is ready to print, in sleep mode, there is no print  
data, or the power switch is off.  
Receiving Data  
The machine is either receiving data from the computer,  
processing data in memory, or printing data.  
Green  
(blinking)  
Data Remaining in Print data remains in the machine memory.  
Memory  
Green  
10  
 
Loading paper and documents  
2
2
b While pressing the green paper-guide  
Loading paper and  
print media  
release lever (1), slide the paper guides  
to fit the paper size you are loading in  
the tray. Make sure that the guides are  
firmly in the slots.  
2
2
The machine can feed paper from the  
standard paper tray.  
When you put paper into the paper tray, note  
the following:  
„ If your application software supports  
paper size selection on the print menu,  
you can select it through the software. If  
your application software does not  
support it, you can set the paper size in  
the printer driver or by using the control  
panel buttons.  
Loading paper in the standard  
paper tray  
1
2
Note  
For Legal and Folio size paper, press the  
release button (1) in the bottom of the  
paper tray and then pull out the back of the  
paper tray. (Legal or Folio size paper is  
not available in some regions.)  
Printing on plain paper, thin paper or  
recycled paper from the paper tray  
2
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
1
11  
     
Chapter 2  
c Fan the stack of paper well to avoid  
f Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent  
paper from sliding off the face-down  
output tray or remove each page as  
soon as it comes out of the machine.  
paper jams and misfeeds.  
d Put paper in the tray, and make sure that  
the paper is below the maximum paper  
mark (1). The side to be printed on must  
be face down.  
1
1
Loading paper in the manual  
feed slot  
2
You can load envelopes and special print  
media one at a time into this slot. Use the  
manual feed slot to print or copy on labels,  
envelopes or thicker paper.  
Printing on plain paper, recycled  
paper or bond paper from the manual  
feed slot  
IMPORTANT  
Make sure the paper guides touch the  
sides of the paper so it will feed correctly.  
If you do not do this, it may cause damage  
to your machine.  
2
Before loading, press the corners and sides  
of the envelopes to make them as flat as  
possible.  
Note  
e Put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine. Make sure that it is completely  
inserted into the machine.  
The machine automatically turns on the  
Manual Feed mode when you put paper in  
the manual feed slot.  
12  
 
Loading paper and documents  
a Lift up the support flap (1) to prevent  
paper from sliding off the face-down  
output tray or remove each page as  
soon as it comes out of the machine.  
d Using both hands, put one piece of  
paper in the manual feed slot with the  
print side face up until the front edge of  
the paper touches the paper feed roller.  
Wait until the machine automatically  
feeds the paper. When you feel the  
machine pull in the paper, let go.  
2
1
b Open the manual feed slot cover.  
Printing on thick paper, labels,  
envelopes or small paper  
2
When the back output tray is pulled down, the  
machine has a straight paper path from the  
manual feed slot through to the back of the  
machine. Use this paper feed and output  
method when you want to print on thick  
paper, labels, envelopes, or paper that is  
smaller than 105 × 148 mm (or A6 size).  
c Using both hands, slide the manual feed  
slot paper guides to the width of the  
paper that you are going to use.  
Note  
• Remove each printed sheet or envelope  
immediately to prevent a paper jam.  
• The machine automatically turns on the  
Manual Feed mode when you put paper in  
the manual feed slot.  
13  
 
Chapter 2  
a Open the back cover (back output tray).  
d Using both hands, slide the manual feed  
slot paper guides to the width of the  
paper that you are going to use.  
b <For printing envelopes only>  
Pull down the two grey levers, one on  
the left-hand side and one on the  
right-hand side, toward you as shown in  
the illustration below.  
e Using both hands, put one sheet of  
paper or one envelope in the manual  
feed slot until the front edge of the paper  
or envelope touches the paper feed  
roller. When you feel the machine pull in  
the paper, let go.  
c Open the manual feed slot cover.  
14  
Loading paper and documents  
• You can still use the machine while the  
scanner is up. To close the scanner, push  
it down with both hands.  
Note  
• Put the paper into the manual feed slot  
with the side to be printed face up.  
• Make sure that the paper or print media  
(see Acceptable paper and other print  
media on page 17) is straight and in the  
correct position on the manual feed slot. If  
it is not, the paper may not be fed  
correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or  
a paper jam.  
2
• Do not put more than one sheet of paper  
in the manual feed slot at any one time, as  
it may cause a jam.  
• Pull the paper out completely when you  
retry putting the paper into the manual  
feed slot.  
• When the top cover is open, you cannot  
open the scanner.  
• If you put paper or other print media in the  
manual feed slot before the machine is in  
the Ready mode, an error may occur and  
the machine will stop printing.  
• To easily remove a small printout from the  
output tray, lift up the scanner by using  
both hands as shown in the illustration.  
15  
Chapter 2  
Unprintable area  
2
Unprintable area for faxes and copies  
2
The figures below show unprintable areas.  
Usage  
Fax  
Document Size Top (1)  
Left (2)  
Right (2)  
3.95 mm  
1 mm  
2
2
1
Bottom (1)  
4 mm  
Letter  
A4  
4 mm  
Copy  
Letter  
A4  
4 mm  
4 mm  
4 mm  
3 mm  
1
Note  
(For copies) This unprintable area shown above is for a single copy or a 1 in 1 copy using A4  
size paper. The area that cannot be printed on will vary by paper size.  
Unprintable area when printing from a computer  
2
When using the printer driver the printable area is smaller than the paper size, as shown below.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
Windows® printer driver and Macintosh printer driver  
BRScript Driver for Windows® and Macintosh  
1
2
4.23 mm  
4.23 mm  
Note  
The area that cannot be printed on may vary depending on the paper size and the printer driver  
you are using. The unprintable area shown above is for A4 size paper.  
16  
 
Loading paper and documents  
Type and size of paper  
2
Acceptable paper and  
other print media  
2
The machine loads paper from the installed  
standard paper tray or manual feed slot.  
Print quality may vary according to the type of  
paper you are using.  
2
Standard paper tray  
2
You can use the following types of print  
media: thin paper, plain paper, thick paper,  
bond paper, recycled paper, labels or  
envelopes.  
Since the standard paper tray is a universal  
type, you can use any of the paper sizes (one  
paper type and size at a time) listed in the  
table in Paper capacity of the paper trays  
on page 18. The standard paper tray can  
hold up to 250 sheets of Letter/A4, Legal or  
Folio size paper (80 gsm). Paper can be  
loaded up to the maximum paper mark on the  
sliding paper width guide.  
For best results, follow the instructions below:  
„ Use paper made for plain paper copying.  
„ Use paper that is 75 to 90 gsm.  
„ DO NOT put different types of paper in the  
paper tray at the same time because it  
may cause paper jams or misfeeds.  
Manual feed slot  
2
„ For correct printing, you must choose the  
same paper size from your software  
application as the paper in the tray.  
The manual feed slot can hold a sheet with a  
size of 76.2 to 220 mm wide and  
116 to 406.4 mm long. You can use the  
manual feed slot if you are using special  
paper, envelopes or labels.  
„ Avoid touching the printed surface of the  
paper immediately after printing.  
„ Use long grain paper with a neutral Ph  
value, and a moisture content of  
approx. 5%.  
The name for the paper trays in the  
printer driver in this Guide are as  
follows:  
2
Tray and slot  
Name  
Standard paper tray  
Manual feed slot  
Tray  
Manual Feed  
17  
     
Chapter 2  
Paper capacity of the paper trays  
2
Paper size  
Paper types  
No. of sheets  
A4, Letter, Legal 1,  
Paper Tray  
Plain paper, Thin paper up to 250 [80 gsm]  
and Recycled paper  
Executive, A5, A5 (Long  
Edge), A6, B5 (ISO),  
B6 (ISO) and Folio 1 2  
.
Manual feed slot  
(Manual Feed)  
Width: 76.2 to 220 mm  
Length: 116 to 406.4 mm  
Plain paper, Thin paper, 1 sheet [80 gsm]  
Thick paper, Thicker  
1 Envelope  
paper, Bond paper,  
Recycled paper,  
Envelopes and Labels.  
1
2
Legal or Folio size paper are not available in some regions.  
Folio size is 215.9 mm x 330.2 mm.  
Recommended paper specifications  
2
The following paper specifications are suitable for this machine.  
Basis weight  
Thickness  
Roughness  
Stiffness  
75-90 gsm  
80-110 µm  
Higher than 20 sec.  
90-150 cm3/100  
Long grain  
Grain direction  
10e9-10e11 ohm  
Volume resistivity  
Surface resistivity  
10e9-10e12 ohm-cm  
CaCO3 (Neutral)  
Filler  
Ash content  
Brightness  
Opacity  
Below 23 wt%  
Higher than 80%  
Higher than 85%  
18  
             
Loading paper and documents  
Types of paper to avoid  
2
Handling and using special  
paper  
2
IMPORTANT  
Some types of paper may not perform well  
or may cause damage to your machine.  
The machine is designed to work well with  
most types of xerographic and bond paper.  
However, some paper variables may have an  
effect on print quality or handling reliability.  
Always test samples of paper before  
2
DO NOT use paper:  
• that is highly textured  
purchasing to ensure desirable performance.  
Store paper in its original packaging and keep  
it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from  
moisture, direct sunlight and heat.  
• that is extremely smooth or shiny  
• that is curled or warped  
1
Some important guidelines when selecting  
paper are:  
„ DO NOT use inkjet paper because it may  
cause a paper jam or damage your  
machine.  
1
1
2 mm or greater curl may cause jams  
to occur.  
„ Preprinted paper must use ink that can  
withstand the temperature of the  
machine’s fusing process (200 degrees  
centigrade).  
• that is coated or has a chemical finish  
• that is damaged, creased or folded  
• that exceeds the recommended weight  
specification in this guide  
„ If you use bond paper, paper having a  
rough surface or paper that is wrinkled or  
creased, the paper may exhibit degraded  
performance.  
• with tabs and staples  
• with letterheads using low temperature  
dyes or thermography  
• that is multipart or carbonless  
• that is designed for inkjet printing  
If you use any of the types of paper listed  
they may damage your machine. This  
damage is not covered under any Brother  
warranty or service agreement.  
19  
   
Chapter 2  
Envelopes  
2
Types of envelopes to avoid  
2
Most envelopes will be suitable for your  
machine. However, some envelopes may  
have feed and print-quality problems  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT use envelopes:  
because of the way they have been made. A  
suitable envelope should have edges with  
straight, well-creased folds and the leading  
edge should not be thicker than two sheets of  
paper. The envelope should lie flat and not be  
of baggy or flimsy construction. You should  
buy quality envelopes from a supplier who  
understands that you will be using the  
envelopes in a laser machine.  
• that are damaged, curled, wrinkled or  
an unusual shape  
• that are extremely shiny or textured  
• with clasps, staples, snaps or tie  
strings  
• with self-adhesive closures  
• that are of a baggy construction  
• that are not sharply creased  
Envelopes can only be fed from the Manual  
feed slot. We recommend that you print a test  
envelope to make sure the print results are  
what you want before you print or purchase a  
large quantity of envelopes.  
• that are embossed (have raised writing  
on them)  
• that were previously printed by a  
laser/LED machine  
Check the following:  
• that are pre-printed on the inside  
„ Envelopes should have a lengthwise  
sealing flap.  
• that cannot be arranged neatly when  
stacked  
„ The sealing flaps should be folded crisply  
and correctly (irregularly cut or folded  
envelopes may cause paper jams).  
• that are made of paper that weighs  
more than the paper weight  
specifications for the machine  
„ Envelopes should consist of two layers of  
paper in the area circled in the figure  
below.  
• with edges that are not straight or  
consistently square  
• with windows, holes, cut-outs or  
perforations  
• with glue on surface as shown in figure  
below  
1
1
1
Feeding direction  
„ Envelope joints that are sealed by the  
manufacturer should be secure.  
• with double flaps as shown in figure  
below  
„ We recommend that you do not print  
within 15 mm of the edges of envelopes.  
20  
 
Loading paper and documents  
• with sealing flaps that have not been  
folded at purchase  
Labels  
2
The machine will print on most types of labels  
designed for use with a laser machine. Labels  
should have an adhesive that is acrylic-based  
since this material is more stable at the high  
temperatures in the fuser unit. Adhesives  
should not come in contact with any part of  
the machine, because the label stock may  
stick to the drum unit or rollers and cause  
jams and print quality problems. No adhesive  
should be exposed between the labels.  
Labels should be arranged so that they cover  
the entire length and width of the sheet. Using  
labels with spaces may result in labels  
peeling off and causing serious jams or print  
problems.  
• with sealing flaps as shown below  
2
• with each side folded as shown below  
All labels used in this machine must be able  
to withstand a temperature of 200 degrees  
centigrade for a period of 0.1 seconds.  
If you use any of the types of envelopes  
listed above, they may damage your  
machine. This damage may not be  
covered under any Brother warranty or  
service agreement.  
Label sheets should not exceed the paper  
weight specifications described in this User’s  
Guide. Labels exceeding this specification  
may not feed or print correctly and may cause  
damage to your machine.  
Occasionally you may experience paper  
feed problems caused by the thickness,  
size and flap shape of the envelopes you  
are using.  
Labels must be fed from the manual feed slot  
only.  
Types of labels to avoid  
2
Do not use labels that are damaged, curled,  
wrinkled or an unusual shape.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT feed part used label sheets. The  
exposed carrier sheet will damage your  
machine.  
21  
 
Chapter 2  
a Unfold the ADF document output  
support flap (1) and the ADF support  
flap (2).  
Loading documents  
2
Using the automatic  
document feeder (ADF)  
2
2
The ADF can hold up to 35 pages and feeds  
each sheet individually. Use standard 80 gsm  
paper and always fan the pages before  
putting them in the ADF.  
1
IMPORTANT  
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the  
scanner glass (Flatbed). If you do this, the  
ADF may jam.  
b Fan the pages well.  
c Place your document face up, top edge  
first in the ADF until the LCD display  
message changes and you feel it touch  
the feed rollers.  
• DO NOT use paper that is curled,  
wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled,  
paper-clipped, pasted or taped.  
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper or  
fabric with the ADF. Instead use the  
scanner glass.  
d Adjust the paper guides (1) to fit the  
width of your document.  
• To avoid damaging your machine while  
using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the  
document while it is feeding.  
1
Note  
To scan documents that are not suitable  
for the ADF, see Using the scanner glass  
(Flatbed) on page 23.  
„ Make sure documents with correction fluid  
or written with ink are completely dry.  
„ Documents to be faxed must be from  
147.3 to 215.9 mm wide and from  
147.3 to 356 mm long, and of a standard  
weight [80 gsm].  
22  
   
Loading paper and documents  
c Close the document cover.  
Using the scanner glass  
(Flatbed)  
2
IMPORTANT  
If the document is a book or is thick do not  
slam the cover or press on it.  
You can use the scanner glass to fax, copy or  
scan pages of a book one page at a time.  
2
Documents can be up to 215.9 mm wide and  
297 mm long.  
Note  
To use the scanner glass, the ADF must  
be empty.  
a Lift the document cover.  
b Using the document guidelines on the  
left and top, place the document face  
down in the upper left corner of the  
scanner glass.  
23  
   
General Setup  
3
3
Mode Timer  
3
Paper settings  
3
The machine has three mode keys on the  
control panel: Fax, Scan, and Copy.  
Paper Type  
3
You can set how much time the machine  
takes after the last Copy or Scan operation to  
return to Fax mode default. If you choose  
Off, the machine will stay in the mode you  
used last.  
Set up the machine for the type of paper you  
are using. This will give you the best print  
quality.  
a Press Menu, 1, 2, 1.  
This setting also sets the time the machine  
will change from individual user to the Public  
mode when using Secure Function Lock.  
(See Switching Users on page 32.)  
b Press a or b to choose Thin, Plain,  
Thick, Thicker or  
Recycled Paper.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Paper Size  
3
You can use ten sizes of paper for printing  
copies: A4, Letter, Legal, Executive, A5,  
A5 L, A6, B5, B6 and Folio.  
a Press Menu, 1, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose 0 Sec,  
30 Secs, 1 Min, 2 Mins, 5 Mins or  
When you change the size of paper in the  
tray, you will also need to change the setting  
for paper size at the same time so your  
machine can fit the document or an incoming  
fax on the page.  
Off.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
a Press Menu, 1, 2, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose A4, Letter,  
Legal, Executive, A5, A5 L, A6, B5,  
B6 or Folio.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
24  
         
General Setup  
Speaker volume  
3
Volume settings  
3
You can choose a range of speaker volume  
levels, from High to Off.  
Ring volume  
3
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 3.  
You can choose a range of ring volume  
levels, from High to Off.  
b Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or  
While in Fax mode press  
or  
to adjust  
High.  
3
the volume level. The LCD will show the  
current setting, and each key press will  
change the volume to the next level. The  
machine will keep the new setting until you  
change it.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
You can also change the ring volume through  
the menu:  
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or  
High.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Beeper volume  
3
When the beeper is on, the machine will beep  
when you press a key, make a mistake, or  
after you send or receive a fax. You can  
choose a range of volume levels, from High  
to Off.  
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose Off, Low, Med or  
High.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
25  
       
Chapter 3  
Set Daylight Saving  
Time  
Ecology features  
3
3
Toner Save  
3
You can set the machine to change for  
Daylight Saving Time. If you choose On, it will  
reset the time forward one hour and if you  
choose Off, it will reset the time backward  
one hour.  
You can save toner using this feature. When  
you set Toner Save to On, prints appear  
lighter. The default setting is Off.  
a Press Menu, 1, 5, 1.  
a Press Menu, 1, 4.  
b Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
We do not recommend Toner Save for  
printing Photo or Greyscale images.  
Sleep Time  
3
The Sleep Time setting can reduce power  
consumption by turning off the fuser while the  
machine is idle.  
You can choose how long the machine must  
be idle before it goes into sleep mode. When  
the machine receives a fax, computer data, or  
makes a copy, the timer will be reset. The  
default setting is 005 minutes.  
While the machine is in sleep mode the LCD  
will display Sleep. When printing or copying  
in sleep mode, there will be a short delay  
while the fuser warms up.  
a Press Menu, 1, 5, 2.  
b Enter the length of time the machine is  
idle before entering sleep mode.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
26  
       
General Setup  
LCD Contrast  
3
Dial Prefix  
3
You can change the contrast to make the  
LCD look lighter or darker.  
The Dial Prefix setting will automatically dial a  
predefined number before every fax number  
you dial. For example: If your telephone  
system requires a 9 to dial an outside number  
use this setting to automatically dial 9 for  
every fax you send.  
a Press Menu, 1, 6.  
b Press a to make the LCD darker. Or,  
press b to make the LCD lighter.  
Press OK.  
3
Setting up the prefix number  
3
c Press Stop/Exit.  
a (for New Zealand) Press Menu, 0, 5.  
Press Menu, 0, 6.  
b Enter the prefix number (up to 5 digits)  
on the dial pad.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• You can use the numbers 0 to 9, #, l  
and !. (Press Hook to display “!”.)  
You cannot use ! with any other numbers  
or characters.  
If your telephone system requires a timed  
break recall (hookflash), press Hook to  
enter the break.  
• (Not available in New Zealand) If the pulse  
dialing mode is on, # and l are not  
available to use.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
27  
       
Chapter 3  
Changing the prefix number  
3
a (for New Zealand) Press Menu, 0, 5.  
Press Menu, 0, 6.  
b Do one of the following:  
„ To change the prefix number,  
press 1.  
„ To exit without making a change,  
press 2. Go to step d.  
c Enter a new prefix number using the dial  
pad (up to 5 digits), press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
28  
   
Security features  
4
4
Secure Function Lock 2.0  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
Note  
• Secure Function Lock can be set manually  
at the control panel or by using Web  
Based Management. We recommend  
using Web Based Management to  
configure this feature. For more  
information, see the Network User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM.  
4
Secure Function Lock lets you restrict Public  
access to the following machine functions:  
„ Fax Tx  
„ Fax Rx  
„ Copy  
4
• Only administrators can set limitations  
and make changes for each user.  
„ Scan  
• When Secure Function Lock is on, you  
can only use 1.Contrast and  
„ USB Direct  
„ PC Print  
„ Color Print  
6.Polled TX, 7.Coverpg Setup  
under 2.Setup Send in the Fax menu.  
If Fax Tx is Off, you cannot use any  
function in the Fax menu.  
This feature also prevents users from  
changing the Default settings of the machine  
by limiting access to the Menu settings.  
• Polling Receive is On only when both Fax  
Tx and Fax Rx are On.  
Before using the security features you must  
first enter an administrator password.  
Setting the password for the  
administrator  
Access to restricted operations can be  
enabled by creating a restricted user.  
Restricted users must enter a user password  
to use the machine.  
4
The password you set in these steps is for the  
administrator. This password is used to set  
up users and to turn Secure Function Lock on  
or off. (See Setting up restricted users  
on page 31 and Turning Secure Function  
Lock on/off on page 31.)  
Make a careful note of your password. If you  
forget it, you will have to reset the password  
stored in the machine. For information about  
how to reset the password call your Brother  
dealer for service.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
b Enter a four-digit number for the  
password using numbers 0–9.  
Press OK.  
c Re-enter the password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
29  
     
Chapter 4  
Changing the password for  
the administrator  
Setting up the public user  
mode  
4
4
Public user mode restricts the functions that  
are available for Public users. Public users do  
not need to enter a password to access the  
features made available through this setting.  
You can set up one Public user.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
Security  
1.Function Lock  
b Press a or b to choose Set Password.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
c Enter the registered four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Setup ID.  
Press OK.  
d Enter a four-digit number for the new  
c Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
password.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose Public.  
Press OK.  
e If the LCD shows Verify: re-enter the  
new password.  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose On or Off for  
Fax Tx.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
After you have set Fax Tx, repeat this  
step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,  
USB Direct, PC Print and  
Color Print. When the LCD shows  
Exit, press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
30  
   
Security features  
Setting up restricted users  
4
Turning Secure Function  
Lock on/off  
4
You can set up users with restrictions and a  
password for functions that are available to  
them. You can set up more advanced  
restrictions, such as by page count or PC  
user login name, through Web Based  
Management. (For more information, see the  
Network User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.) You  
can set up to 25 restricted users with  
restrictions and a password.  
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD will  
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the  
correct password.  
Turning Secure Function Lock on  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Lock OffiOn.  
Press OK.  
4
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
c Enter your four-digit administrator  
b Press a or b to choose Setup ID.  
Press OK.  
password.  
Press OK.  
c Enter the administrator password.  
Press OK.  
Turning Secure Function Lock off  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
d Press a or b to choose User01.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Lock OniOff.  
Press OK.  
e Use the numeric keys to enter the user  
name. (See Entering text on page 213.)  
Press OK.  
c Enter your four-digit administrator  
password.  
Press OK.  
f Enter a four-digit password for the user.  
Press OK.  
g Press a or b to choose On or Off for  
Fax Tx.  
Press OK.  
After you have set Fax Tx, repeat this  
step for Fax Rx, Copy, Scan,  
USB Direct, PC Print and  
Color Print. When the LCD shows  
Exit, press OK.  
h Repeat steps d to g for entering each  
additional user and password.  
i Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
You cannot use the same name as  
another user’s name.  
31  
           
Chapter 4  
Switching Users  
4
Memory Security  
(MFC-9120CN only)  
4
This setting allows you to switch between  
registered restricted users or Public mode  
when Secure Function Lock is turned on.  
Memory Security lets you prevent  
unauthorized access to the machine.  
Changing to the restricted user Mode  
While Memory Security is on, the following  
operations are available:  
a Hold down Shift as you press Secure.  
„ Receiving faxes into memory (limited by  
b Press a or b to choose your name.  
Press OK.  
memory capacity)  
„ Fax Forwarding (if Fax Forwarding was  
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
already on)  
„ Remote Retrieval (if Fax Storage was  
already on)  
Note  
While Memory Security is on, the following  
operations are NOT available:  
If you press a Mode key that is restricted,  
Access Denied will appear on the LCD  
and then the machine will ask your name.  
If you are a restricted user with access to  
this Mode, press a or b to choose your  
name and enter your four-digit password.  
„ Printing received faxes  
„ Sending faxes  
„ Copying  
„ PC printing  
Changing to the Public Mode  
„ Scanning  
After a restricted user has finished using the  
machine, it will return to the Public setting  
within the same time as the Mode Timer  
setting (Menu, 1, 1). (See Mode Timer  
on page 24.) You can also exit from the  
restricted user mode by pressing the current  
Mode key you are in. Then LCD will ask you  
Go to Public?.  
„ PC Fax Receive  
Note  
• To print the faxes in memory, turn off  
Memory Security.  
• You must turn off PC Fax Receive before  
you can turn on Memory Security. (See  
Turning off Remote Fax Options  
on page 75.)  
Press 1 to choose 1.Yes.  
32  
   
Security features  
Setting up the password  
4
Turning memory security  
on/off  
4
Note  
If you enter the wrong password when  
following the instructions below, the LCD will  
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the  
correct password.  
• If you have already set the password, you  
will not need to set it, again.  
• If you forget the Memory Security  
password, please call your Brother dealer.  
Turning memory security on  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
4
Security  
1.Mem Security  
Security  
1.Mem Security  
b Enter a four-digit number for the  
password using numbers 0–9.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Set Security.  
Press OK.  
c Enter your registered four-digit  
password.  
c Re-enter the password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
Press OK.  
The machine goes offline and the LCD  
shows Secure Mode.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Changing your memory  
security password  
If there is a power failure faxes will remain  
in memory for up to 60 hours.  
4
Turning memory security off  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 1.  
a Press Menu.  
Security  
1.Mem Security  
Enter the registered four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
b Press a or b to choose Set Password.  
Press OK.  
b Memory Security is automatically turned  
off and the LCD shows the date and  
time.  
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
Note  
d Enter a four-digit number for the new  
If you enter the wrong password, the LCD  
shows Wrong Password and stays  
offline. The machine will stay in Secure  
Mode until the registered password is  
entered.  
password.  
Press OK.  
e Re-enter the password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
33  
     
Chapter 4  
Changing your Setting Lock  
password  
Setting Lock  
4
4
Setting Lock lets you set a password to stop  
other people from accidentally changing your  
machine settings.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose Set Password.  
Press OK.  
Make a careful note of your password. If you  
forget it, you will have to reset the passwords  
stored in the machine. Please call your  
administrator or your Brother dealer.  
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
While Setting Lock is On, you cannot change  
the following settings without a password:  
d Enter a four-digit number for the new  
password.  
„ Date/Time  
Press OK.  
„ Station ID  
e Re-enter your new password when the  
LCD shows Verify:.  
„ Quick Dial settings  
„ Mode Timer  
Press OK.  
„ Paper Type  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
„ Paper Size  
„ Volume  
Turning Setting Lock on/off  
4
„ Daylight Save  
„ Ecology  
If you enter the wrong password when  
following the instructions below, the LCD will  
show Wrong Password. Re-enter the  
correct password.  
„ LCD Contrast  
„ Setting Lock  
Turning Setting Lock on  
„ Secure Function Lock (MFC-9320CW)  
„ Memory Security (MFC-9120CN)  
„ Dial Restriction  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose On.  
Press OK.  
Setting up the password  
4
c Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Turning Setting Lock off  
b Enter a four-digit number for the  
password using numbers 0–9.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu, 1, 7, 2.  
c Re-enter your password when the LCD  
shows Verify:.  
b Enter your four-digit password.  
Press OK twice.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
34  
       
Security features  
Speed Dial restriction  
4
Restricting dialling  
4
This feature is to prevent users from sending  
a fax or call to a wrong number by mistake.  
You can set the machine to restrict dialling by  
using the dial pad, One Touch and Speed  
Dial.  
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 3.  
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
If you choose Off, the machine does not  
restrict the dialling method.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
If you choose Enter # twice, the machine  
will prompt you to re-enter the number, and  
then if you re-enter the same number  
correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you  
re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will  
show an error message.  
Note  
4
• The Enter # twice setting will not work  
if you lift an external handset before  
entering the number. You will not be  
asked to re-enter the number.  
• The machine cannot restrict dialling from  
If you choose On, the machine will restrict all  
fax sending and outbound calls for that  
dialling method.  
Redial/Pause.  
• If you chose On or Enter # twice, you  
cannot use the Broadcasting feature and  
cannot combine quick dial numbers when  
dialling.  
Dial pad restriction  
4
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
One Touch restriction  
a Press Menu, 2, 6, 2.  
4
b Press a or b to choose Off,  
Enter # twice or On.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
35  
         
Chapter 4  
36  
Section II  
Fax  
II  
Sending a fax  
38  
46  
52  
63  
72  
79  
82  
Receiving a fax  
Telephone and external devices  
Dialling and storing numbers  
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)  
Polling  
Printing reports  
 
Sending a fax  
5
5
Sending a fax from the  
scanner glass  
How to fax  
5
5
Entering fax mode  
5
You can use the scanner glass to fax the  
pages of a book, or a single page at a time.  
The documents can be up to Letter or A4  
size. Press Stop/Exit to cancel a fax in  
progress.  
To enter fax mode press  
key will glow blue.  
(Fax), and the  
Sending a fax from the ADF  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
Using the ADF to send your faxes is the  
easiest way. To cancel a fax in progress  
press Stop/Exit.  
b Place your document face down on the  
scanner glass.  
c Dial the fax number. (See How to dial  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
on page 63.)  
b Place your document face up, top edge  
first in the ADF until the LCD display  
changes and you feel it touch the feed  
rollers.  
d Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
„ If you press Mono Start, the  
machine starts scanning the first  
page. Go to step e.  
c Dial the fax number. (See How to dial  
„ If you press Colour Start, the  
machine starts sending. Go to  
step g.  
on page 63.)  
d Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
e After the machine scans the page, the  
LCD will prompt you to choose one of  
the options below:  
„ If you press Mono Start, the  
machine scans the pages into  
memory and then sends the  
document.  
Next Page?  
1.Yes 2.No(Send)  
„ If you press Colour Start, the  
machine starts dialling and sends the  
document in real time.  
„ Press 1 to send another page. Go to  
step f.  
„ Press 2 or Mono Start to send the  
document. Go to step g.  
Note  
If an Out of Memory message appears  
while scanning a document into memory,  
press Stop/Exit to cancel or Mono Start  
to send the scanned pages.  
f Place the next page on the scanner  
glass, press OK. Repeat steps e and f  
for each additional page.  
Set Next Page  
Then Press OK  
38  
             
Sending a fax  
g Your machine will automatically send  
Broadcasting  
the fax.  
(black & white only)  
5
Note  
Broadcasting lets you send the same fax  
message to more than one fax number. You  
can include Groups, One Touch, Speed Dial  
numbers and up to 50 manually dialled  
numbers in the same broadcast.  
When faxing multiple pages from the  
scanner glass, real time transmission  
should be set to Off. (See Real Time  
Transmission on page 43.)  
You can broadcast up to 258 different  
numbers. This will depend on how many  
groups, access codes or credit card numbers  
you have stored, and on how many delayed  
or stored faxes in memory.  
Faxing Letter size document  
from the scanner glass  
5
When faxing Letter size documents, you will  
need to set the scan glass size to Letter;  
otherwise, a portion of your faxes will be  
missing.  
5
Note  
Use  
(Address Book) to help you  
choose numbers easily.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode.  
b Press Menu, 1, 8, 1.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Load your document.  
.
c Press a or b to choose Letter.  
Press OK.  
c Enter a number.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
You can use either a One Touch,  
Speed Dial, a Group number, or a  
Cancelling a fax in progress  
5
number manually entered using the dial  
pad. (See How to dial on page 63.)  
Press Stop/Exit to cancel the fax. If you  
press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialling  
or sending, the LCD will show  
1.Clear 2.Exit, press 1 to cancel the  
fax.  
d Repeat step c until you have entered  
all the fax numbers you want to  
broadcast to.  
e Press Mono Start.  
After the broadcast is finished the machine  
will print a broadcast report to let you know  
the results.  
Note  
The scan profile of the One Touch,  
Speed Dial or Group number you chose  
first will be applied to the broadcast.  
39  
         
Chapter 5  
Cancelling a Broadcast in  
progress  
Additional sending  
operations  
5
5
a Press Menu, 2, 7.  
Sending faxes using multiple  
settings  
The LCD will show the Broadcast job  
number followed by the fax number (or  
name) being dialed (for example,  
#001 0123456789).  
5
Before you send a fax, you can change any  
combination of these settings: contrast,  
resolution, overseas mode, delayed fax timer,  
polling transmission, real time transmission  
or cover page settings.  
b Press OK.  
The LCD will show the following  
message:  
#001 0123456789  
1.Clear 2.Exit  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
After each setting is accepted, the LCD  
asks if you want to enter more settings.  
c Press 1 to cancel the fax number being  
dialed.  
The LCD will then show the following  
message:  
Next  
1.Yes 2.No  
Broadcast#001  
1.Clear 2.Exit  
b Do one of the following:  
„ To choose more settings, press 1.  
The LCD returns to the Setup Send  
menu so you can choose another  
setting.  
d To cancel the Broadcast, press 1.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
„ If you have finished choosing  
settings, press 2 and go to the next  
step for sending your fax.  
40  
     
Sending a fax  
Composing your own comments  
5
Electronic cover page  
(black & white only)  
You can set up two comments of your own.  
5
This feature will not work unless you have  
already programmed your Station ID. (See  
the Quick Setup Guide.)  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 8.  
.
You can automatically send a cover page  
with every fax. Your cover page includes your  
Station ID, a comment, and the name (or  
number) stored in the One Touch or Speed  
Dial memory.  
c Press a or b to choose 5 or 6 to store  
your own comment.  
Press OK.  
d Enter your own comment using the dial  
pad.  
Press OK.  
By choosing Next Fax:On you can also  
display the number of pages on the cover  
page.  
5
Use the chart on page 213 for help entering  
characters.  
You can choose one of the following preset  
comments.  
Send a cover page for the next fax  
5
1.Note Off  
If you want to send a cover page only for the  
next fax, your machine will ask you to enter  
the number of pages you are sending so it  
can be printed on the cover page.  
2.Please Call  
3.Urgent  
4.Confidential  
Instead of using one of the preset comments,  
you can enter two personal messages of your  
own, up to 26 characters long. Use the chart  
on page 213 for help entering characters.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.  
(See Composing your own comments  
on page 41.)  
d Press a or b to choose Next Fax:On  
(or Next Fax:Off).  
5.(User Defined)  
6.(User Defined)  
Press OK.  
e Press a or b to choose a comment.  
Press OK.  
f Enter two digits to show the number of  
pages you are sending.  
Press OK.  
For example, enter 0, 2 for 2 pages or  
0, 0 to leave the number of pages blank.  
If you make a mistake, press d or  
Clear/Back to back up and re-enter the  
number of pages.  
41  
       
Chapter 5  
Send a cover page for all faxes  
5
Contrast  
5
You can set the machine to send a cover  
page whenever you send a fax.  
For most documents the default setting of  
Auto will give the best results. It  
automatically chooses the suitable contrast  
for your document.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.  
.
If your document is very light or dark,  
changing the contrast may improve the  
quality of the fax.  
c Press a or b to choose On (or Off).  
Press OK.  
Use Dark to make the faxed document  
lighter.  
d Press a or b to choose a comment.  
Press OK.  
Use Light to make the faxed document  
darker.  
Using a printed cover page  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
If you want to use a printed cover page that  
you can write on, you can print the sample  
page and attach it to your fax.  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 1.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 7.  
.
d Press a or b to choose Auto, Light or  
Dark.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Print Sample.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Even if you choose Light or Dark, the  
machine will send the fax using the Auto  
setting if you choose Photo as the Fax  
Resolution.  
d Press Start.  
e After the machine prints a copy of your  
cover page, press Stop/Exit.  
Changing Fax Resolution  
5
The quality of a fax can be improved by  
changing the Fax Resolution. Resolution can  
be changed for the next fax or for all faxes.  
To change the Fax Resolution setting  
for the next fax  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Load your document.  
.
c Press Resolution, then a or b to choose  
the resolution.  
Press OK.  
42  
       
Sending a fax  
To change the default Fax Resolution  
setting  
Dual access  
(black & white only)  
5
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 2.  
.
You can dial a number, and start scanning the  
fax into memory even when the machine is  
sending from memory, receiving faxes or  
printing PC data. The LCD will show the new  
job number.  
c Press a or b to choose the resolution  
you want.  
The number of pages you can scan into the  
memory will vary depending on the data that  
is printed on them.  
Press OK.  
Note  
You can choose four different resolution  
settings for black & white faxes and two for  
colour.  
Note  
5
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while scanning the first page of a fax,  
press Stop/Exit to cancel scanning. If you  
get an Out of Memory message while  
scanning a subsequent page, you can  
press Mono Start to send the pages  
scanned so far, or press Stop/Exit to  
cancel the operation.  
Black & white  
Standard  
Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
Fine  
Good for small print and  
transmits a little slower than  
Standard resolution.  
S.Fine  
Photo  
Good for small print or artwork  
and transmits slower than Fine  
resolution.  
Real Time Transmission  
5
When you are sending a fax, the machine will  
scan the document into the memory before  
sending it. Then, as soon as the telephone  
line is free, the machine will start dialling and  
sending.  
Use when the document has  
varying shades of grey or is a  
photograph. This has the  
slowest transmission time.  
Colour  
Sometimes, you may want to send an  
important document immediately, without  
waiting for memory transmission. You can set  
Real Time TX to On for all documents or  
Next Fax:On for the next fax only.  
Standard  
Suitable for most typed  
documents.  
Fine  
Use when the document is a  
photograph. The transmission  
time is slower than Standard  
resolution.  
Note  
If the memory is full and you are sending a  
black and white fax from the ADF, the  
machine will send the document in real  
time (even if Real Time TX is set to off). If  
the memory is full, faxes from the scanner  
glass cannot be sent until you clear some  
of the memory.  
If you choose S.Fine or Photo and then  
use the Colour Start key to send a fax,  
the machine will send the fax using the  
Fine setting.  
The time taken to send will increase when  
selecting S.Fine or Photo.  
In Real Time Transmission, the automatic  
redial feature does not work when using  
the scanner glass.  
43  
     
Chapter 5  
Sending in real time for all faxes  
5
Delayed Fax  
(black & white only)  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.  
.
You can store up to 50 faxes in the memory  
to be sent within a twenty four hour period.  
c Press a or b to choose On.  
Press OK.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 3.  
Sending in real time for the next fax  
only  
5
d Enter the time you want the fax to be  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.  
.
sent (in 24-hour format).  
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM)  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Next Fax:On.  
Press OK.  
Note  
The number of pages you can scan into  
the memory depends on the amount of  
data printed on each page.  
Not sending in real time for the next  
fax only  
5
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 5.  
.
Delayed batch transmission  
(black & white only)  
5
Before sending the delayed faxes, your  
machine will help you economize by sorting  
all the faxes in the memory by destination and  
scheduled time.  
c Press a or b to choose Next Fax:Off.  
Press OK.  
Overseas Mode  
5
All delayed faxes that are scheduled to be  
sent at the same time to the same fax number  
will be sent as one fax to save transmission  
time.  
If you are having difficulty sending a fax  
overseas due to a bad connection, then  
turning on Overseas Mode may help.  
This is a temporary setting, and will only be  
active for your next fax.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 2, 4.  
.
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 9.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
44  
     
Sending a fax  
Checking and cancelling  
waiting jobs  
Out of memory message  
5
5
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while scanning the first page of a fax, press  
Stop/Exit to cancel the fax.  
Check which jobs are still waiting in the  
memory to be sent. If there are no jobs, the  
LCD will show No Jobs Waiting. You can  
cancel a fax job that is stored and waiting in  
the memory.  
If you get an Out of Memory message  
while scanning a subsequent page, you will  
have the option to press Mono Start to send  
the pages scanned so far, or to press  
Stop/Exit to cancel the operation.  
a Press Menu, 2, 7.  
The number of jobs still to be sent will be  
displayed.  
Note  
„ If you get an Out of Memory message  
while faxing and you do not want to delete  
your stored faxes to clear the memory,  
you can send the fax in real time. (See  
Real Time Transmission on page 43.)  
b Do one of the following:  
5
„ Press a or b to scroll though the  
waiting jobs, press OK to choose a  
job, and then press 1 to cancel it.  
„ Press 2 to exit without cancelling.  
„ To make extra memory available, you can  
do the following:  
c When you have finished, press  
Stop/Exit.  
• Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
(See Printing a fax from the memory  
on page 51.)  
Sending a fax manually  
5
• Turn off Fax storage. (See Turning off  
Remote Fax Options on page 75.)  
Manual transmission  
5
• Add Optional Memory. (See Memory  
board on page 123.)  
Manual transmission lets you hear the  
dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while  
sending a fax.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Load your document.  
.
c Press Hook and listen for a dial tone. Or  
pick up the handset of an external  
telephone and listen for a dial tone.  
d Dial the fax number you want to call.  
e When you hear the fax tone, press  
Mono Start or Colour Start.  
„ If you are using the scanner glass,  
press 1 to send a fax.  
f Replace the handset of an external  
telephone.  
45  
       
Receiving a fax  
6
6
Receive modes  
6
You must choose a receive mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you  
have on your line. The diagrams below will help you choose the correct mode. (For more detailed  
information about the receive modes, see Using receive modes on page 47.)  
Choosing the receive mode  
6
Do you want to use the telephone features of your machine (if available) or  
an external telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the  
same line as the machine?  
Yes  
No  
Are you using the voice message function of  
an external telephone answering device?  
Fax Only  
No  
Manual  
Do you want the machine to answer fax and  
telephone calls automatically?  
No  
Fax/Tel  
Yes  
Yes  
External TAD  
To set the receive mode follow the instructions below.  
a Press Menu, 0, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose the receive mode.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
The LCD will display the current receive mode.  
46  
     
Receiving a fax  
External TAD  
6
Using receive modes  
6
External TAD mode lets an external  
answering device manage your incoming  
calls. Incoming calls will be dealt with in the  
following ways:  
Some receive modes answer faxes  
automatically (Fax Only and Fax/Tel).  
You may want to change the Ring Delay  
before using these modes. (See Ring Delay  
on page 48.)  
„ Faxes will be automatically received.  
„ Voice callers can record a message on the  
Fax Only  
6
external TAD.  
(For more information see Connecting an  
external TAD on page 58.)  
Fax Only mode will automatically answer  
every call as a fax.  
Fax/Tel  
6
Fax/Tel mode helps you automatically  
manage incoming calls, by recognising  
whether they are fax or voice calls and  
dealing with them in one of the following  
ways:  
6
„ Faxes will be automatically received.  
„ Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you  
to pick up the line. The F/T ring is a fast  
double ring made by your machine.  
„ Use this mode if you receive few voice calls.  
(Also see F/T Ring Time (Fax/Tel mode only)  
on page 48 and Ring Delay on page 48.)  
Manual  
6
Manual mode turns off all automatic  
answering functions unless you are using the  
Distinctive Ring 1 feature.  
1
Fax Ability in New Zealand.  
To receive a fax in Manual mode lift the  
handset of the external telephone. When you  
hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press  
Mono Start, and then press 2 to receive a  
fax. You can also use the Fax Detect feature  
to receive faxes by lifting a handset on the  
same line as the machine.  
(Also see Fax Detect on page 49.)  
If you use a computer modem on the same  
line, Faxing will not operate correctly.  
47  
             
Chapter 6  
F/T Ring Time  
(Fax/Tel mode only)  
Receive Mode settings  
6
6
Ring Delay  
6
When somebody calls your machine, you and  
your caller will hear the normal telephone ring  
sound. The number of rings is set by the Ring  
Delay setting.  
The Ring Delay setting sets the number of  
times the machine rings before it answers in  
Fax Only and Fax/Tel modes.  
If the call is a fax, then your machine will  
receive it; however, if it is a voice call the  
machine will sound the F/T ring (a fast  
double-ring) for the time you have set in the  
F/T Ring Time setting. If you hear the F/T ring  
it means that you have a voice caller on the  
line.  
If you have external or extension telephones  
on the same line as the machine, choose the  
maximum number of rings. (See Operation  
from external or extension telephones  
on page 60 and Fax Detect on page 49.)  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 1.  
.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine,  
extension and external telephones will not  
ring; however, you can still answer the call on  
any telephone. (For more information see  
Using Remote Codes on page 61.)  
c Press a or b to choose how many times  
the line rings before the machine  
answers (02-10 for Australia, 01-10 for  
New Zealand, 00-10 for some countries).  
Press OK.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 2.  
.
d Press Stop/Exit.  
c Press a or b to choose how long the  
machine will ring to alert you that you  
have a voice call (20, 30, 40 or  
70 seconds for Australia and some  
countries, 20, 30, 40 or 55 seconds for  
New Zealand).  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
48  
         
Receiving a fax  
Fax Detect  
6
Setting the Print Density  
6
You can adjust the Print Density setting to  
make your printed pages darker or lighter.  
If Fax Detect is On:  
6
The machine can receive a fax automatically,  
even if you answer the call. When you see  
Receiving on the LCD or hear a click on the  
phone line through the handset you are  
using, just replace the handset. Your  
machine will do the rest.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 7.  
.
c Press a to make the print darker.  
Or, press b to make the print lighter.  
Press OK.  
If Fax Detect is Off:  
6
d Press Stop/Exit.  
If you are at the machine and answer a fax  
call first by lifting the external handset, then  
press Mono Start or Colour Start, and then  
press 2 to receive.  
6
If you answered at an extension telephone  
press l51 (l91 for New Zealand).  
(See Operation from external or extension  
telephones on page 60.)  
Note  
• If this feature is set to On, but your  
machine does not connect a fax call when  
you lift an external or extension telephone  
handset, press the remote activation code  
l51 (l91 for New Zealand).  
• If you send faxes from a computer on the  
same telephone line and the machine  
intercepts them, set Fax Detect to Off.  
• We do not recommend having a PC plus  
fax machine on the same line.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 3.  
.
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
49  
     
Chapter 6  
Receiving faxes into memory  
(black & white only)  
Additional receiving  
operations  
6
6
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty  
during fax reception, the screen will display  
No Paper, asking you to put paper in the  
paper tray. (See Loading paper and print  
media on page 11.) If you are unable to put  
paper in the paper tray the following will  
happen:  
Printing a reduced incoming  
fax  
6
If you choose On, the machine automatically  
reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on  
one page of A4, Letter, Legal or Folio size  
paper.  
If Memory Receive is On:  
6
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by  
using the page size of the fax and your Paper  
Size setting (Menu, 1, 2, 2).  
The machine will carry on receiving the fax,  
with the remaining pages being stored in  
memory, if enough memory is available.  
Further incoming faxes will also be stored into  
memory until the memory is full. When the  
memory is full the machine will stop  
automatically answering calls. To print the  
faxes, put fresh paper in the tray and press  
Mono Start or Colour Start.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 5.  
.
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
If Memory Receive is Off:  
6
The machine will carry on receiving the  
current fax, with the remaining pages being  
stored in memory, if enough memory is  
available. Further incoming faxes will not be  
stored in memory. The machine will then stop  
automatically answering calls until fresh  
paper is put in the paper tray. To print the last  
fax you received, put fresh paper in the tray  
and press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
Setting the Fax Receive  
Stamp (black & white only)  
6
You can set the machine to print the received  
date and time in the top centre of each  
received fax page.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 9.  
.
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 6.  
.
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
c Use a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
• The received time and date will not appear  
when using Internet Fax.  
• Make sure you have set the current date  
and time in the machine. (See the Quick  
Setup Guide.)  
50  
       
Receiving a fax  
Printing a fax from the  
memory  
6
If you are using the Fax Storage feature  
(Menu, 2, 5, 1), you can still print a fax from  
the memory when you are at your machine.  
(See Fax Storage on page 73.)  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 3.  
b Press Start.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Out of Paper Reception  
(black & white only)  
6
6
As soon as the paper tray becomes empty  
during fax reception, the LCD shows  
No Paper. Put some paper in the paper tray.  
(See Loading paper and print media  
on page 11.)  
The machine will carry on receiving the fax,  
with the remaining pages being stored in  
memory, if enough memory is available.  
51  
   
Telephone and external devices  
7
7
Telephone line  
services  
Telephone Service for  
Australia  
7
7
Features like Voice Mail, Call Waiting, Call  
Waiting/Caller ID, RingMaster, answering  
services, alarm systems or other custom  
features on one telephone line may create  
®
®
®
Telstra FaxStream Duet  
(Distinctive Ringing)  
7
Telstra® FaxStream® Duet® is an enhanced  
Public Switched Telephone Service (PSTS)  
problems with the operation of your machine.  
offered by Telstra® that allows you to have an  
additional number on one telephone line, with  
Do you have Voice Mail?  
7
its own distinctive ring pattern. Telstra®  
FaxStream® Duet® is a call handling feature  
that helps users distinguish voice and  
facsimile calls. With FaxStream® Duet®,  
incoming calls to a fax number are  
announced by a different, distinctive ring  
signal. Only one call can be answered (or  
made) at any one time and while this call is in  
progress, incoming calls to either number will  
be presented with a busy tone.  
If you have Voice Mail on the telephone line  
that you will install your new Machine on,  
there is a strong possibility that Voice Mail  
and the Machine will conflict with each other  
while receiving incoming calls. However, the  
Distinctive Ring feature allows you to use  
more than one number on your line, so  
both Voice Mail and the Machine can work  
together without any problems. If each one  
has a separate telephone number, neither will  
interfere with the other’s operations.  
Your machine has a Distinctive Ringing  
function, allowing you to dedicate one  
telephone number just for receiving faxes.  
If you decide to get the Distinctive Ring  
service from the telephone company, you will  
need to follow the directions to ‘register’ the  
new Distinctive Ring pattern they give you.  
This is so your Machine can recognize its  
incoming calls.  
Note  
After you have set the Distinctive Ring  
feature to On, the receive mode is set to  
Manual automatically. Your Distinctive  
Ring Number does not allow Voice Calls -  
only Faxes. You cannot change the  
receive mode from Manual mode while  
the Distinctive Ring is set to On.  
52  
         
Telephone and external devices  
What is the Advantage of using  
How does Telstra® FaxStream® Duet®  
Work?  
Telstra® FaxStream® Duet® Function?  
7
7
Using Telstra® FaxStream® Duet® is the  
most efficient way to receive both fax and  
telephone calls on the same line. When the  
voice call comes in, all telephones (extension  
and external) and the fax machine will ring to  
alert you to pick it up. If a fax call comes in,  
the fax machine will answer automatically  
without ringing, whereas the extension and  
external telephones will ring twice with a  
distinctive ring pattern. It is also a more  
efficient way of operating a Fax machine with  
an extension telephone as you do not have to  
use the remote activation codes. It gives you  
two independent numbers without the higher  
cost of a second line.  
Incoming calls to the voice number, will have  
the standard ring pattern of long, long tone,  
followed by a pause, repeated, while the new  
fax number will have a different ring pattern of  
three short bursts of ring, repeated at regular  
intervals.  
When FaxStream® Duet® is On and you  
receive a voice call all extension and external  
telephones will ring with a standard ring  
pattern. The fax machine will ring on the third  
ring with a standard ring pattern. All external  
and the extension telephones will continue to  
ring, until you or a telephone answering  
device can answer the voice number.  
When FaxStream® Duet® is On and you  
receive a fax call on the Duet® number the  
Fax machine will answer and automatically  
receive the fax message without ringing. On  
the other hand, all extension and external  
telephones will ring twice with a distinctive  
ring pattern. Do not answer the telephone as  
you are receiving a fax message.  
7
Flowchart Sequence of Incoming call  
Incoming Call  
(either Voice or Fax)  
All extension phones ring twice,  
fax machine is silent.  
Registered  
Main number  
Duet (Fax)  
(Voice Number)  
Number  
Fax machine  
Fax machine  
begins ringing  
on third ring.  
automatically  
receives and prints  
fax message  
without ringing.  
You answer the call  
Telephone Answering  
Device (TAD)  
answers the call.  
at an external telephone  
or an extension  
telephone.  
53  
Chapter 7  
Set the Distinctive Ring to ON  
Very important!  
Telephone Service for  
New Zealand  
7
7
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature  
to ON, the receive mode is set to Manual  
automatically. Your Distinctive Ring Number  
does not allow Voice Calls - only Faxes. You  
cannot change the receive mode to another  
mode while the Distinctive Ring is set to On:  
FaxAbility  
7
FaxAbility is a service offered by Telecom  
that allows you to have an additional number  
on one telephone line, with its own distinctive  
ring pattern. This way, when you get an  
incoming call, you can identify the number  
being called by its ring.  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose On.  
c Press OK.  
How Will the Fax Machine Treat All  
Other Numbers?  
d Press Stop/Exit. Distinctive Ring is now  
7
set to on.  
FaxAbility mode ensures that the machine  
will answer calls to the FaxAbility (secondary)  
number. When a call comes in to your main  
number, all the telephones will ring. You can  
set an external answering device (TAD) to  
answer calls on the other number(s). (See the  
chart in the following page.)  
Turning off Distinctive Ring  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose Off.  
c Press OK.  
7
What is the Advantage of Using the  
FaxAbility Function?  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
7
Using FaxAbility is the most efficient way to  
receive both fax and telephone calls on the  
same line. It is much easier for your callers  
who dial manually. The fax machine will  
answer with receiving tones so they will not  
have to press an activation code. And the  
people who call to talk on your main number  
will not have to talk to your fax machine.  
Basically, it gives you two independent  
numbers without the higher cost of a second  
line.  
Note  
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the  
machine will stay in Manual receive  
mode. You will need to set the Receive  
Mode again. (See Choosing the receive  
mode on page 46.)  
54  
     
Telephone and external devices  
How Does FaxAbility Work?  
7
Note  
Your telephone number will have the  
standard ring pattern of long, long tone, while  
the new number will have a ring pattern of  
long, silence, long, etc. When FaxAbility is  
On, you will not hear the first ring of all  
incoming calls on the fax machine. Extension  
telephones will ring as usual. If the fax  
machine recognizes the ring pattern, all  
ringing will stop and the fax machine will  
answer and automatically receive the fax  
message. Otherwise, you will hear the  
extension telephones and the fax machine  
continue to ring. The fax machine always  
listens to the ring pattern before it answers,  
so do not pick up the telephone during that  
time. You will quickly learn to recognize the  
ring pattern for faxes, so you will not be  
tempted to answer that number. Either you or  
a telephone answering device can answer  
the main number(s).  
After you have set the FaxAbility feature to  
On, the receive mode is set to Manual  
automatically. Unless you have a TAD or  
Voice Mail set up on the FaxAbility  
number, Manual mode means you must  
answer all the call yourself. You can not  
change the receive mode to the other  
mode while the FaxAbility is set to on.  
7
Flowchart Sequence of Incoming call  
Incoming Call  
(either Voice or Fax)  
All extension phones ring twice,  
fax machine is silent.  
Registered  
Main number  
Duet (Fax)  
(Voice Number)  
Number  
Fax machine  
Fax machine  
begins ringing  
on third ring.  
automatically  
receives and prints  
fax message  
without ringing.  
You answer the call  
Telephone Answering  
Device (TAD)  
answers the call.  
at an external telephone  
or an extension  
telephone.  
55  
Chapter 7  
How to Turn FaxAbility OFF or ON  
7
Telephone Service for  
Some Countries  
The FaxAbility function is designed to  
accommodate the FaxAbilityservice provided  
by Telecom. To change the setting, repeat  
Steps 1-3; Step 2 is where you can choose  
either On or Off.  
7
Distinctive Ringing (For  
Singapore and Hong Kong)  
7
Call Waiting beeps caused by incoming calls  
on your main number can affect fax  
This machine feature lets you use the  
Distinctive Ringing subscriber service offered  
by some telephone companies, which allows  
you to have several telephone numbers on  
one telephone line. Each telephone number  
has its own Distinctive Ringing pattern, so  
you will know which telephone number is  
ringing. This is one way you can have a  
separate telephone number for your  
machine.  
transmissions. If you have FaxAbility Service  
but don’t have Call Waiting, you need do  
nothing at this stage. If you do have Call  
Waiting as well as FaxAbility, set the Call  
Waiting menu option to On. See below.  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
b Press a or b to set FaxAbility to On or  
Off.  
If you have FaxAbility service, choose  
On.  
Press OK.  
Your machine has a Distinctive Ringing  
function, allowing you to dedicate one  
telephone number just for receiving faxes.  
You will need to set Distinctive Ringing to On.  
c Press a or b to set Call Waiting to On or  
Off. If you have Call Waiting service,  
choose On to avoid the trouble caused  
by Call Waiting.  
Note  
• You can switch it off temporarily, then  
turn it back on. When you get a new fax  
number, make sure you reset this  
function.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
• The machine will answer only calls to  
the Distinctive Ringing number.  
Note  
After you have set the Distinctive Ring  
feature to On, the receive mode is set to  
Manual automatically. Unless you have a  
TAD or Voice Mail set up on the Distinctive  
Ring number, Manual mode means you  
must answer all the call yourself. You can  
not change the receive mode to the other  
mode while the Distinctive Ring is set to  
On.  
56  
   
Telephone and external devices  
Registering the Distinctive Ring  
pattern  
Very important!  
Caller ID  
(not available in India)  
7
7
The Caller ID feature lets you use the Caller  
ID subscriber service offered by many local  
telephone companies. Call your telephone  
company for details. This service shows the  
telephone number, or name if it is available,  
of your caller as the line rings.  
After you have set the Distinctive Ring feature  
to ON, the receive mode is set to Manual  
automatically. Unless you have a TAD or  
Voice Mail set up on the Distinctive Ring  
number, Manual mode means you must  
answer all the calls yourself. You can not  
change the receive mode to another mode  
while the Distinctive Ring is set to on.  
After a few rings, the LCD will show the  
telephone number of your caller (and name, if  
available). Once you answer a call, the Caller  
ID information disappears from the LCD, but  
the call information stays stored in the Caller  
ID memory.  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose On.  
c Press OK.  
„ You will see the number (or name) on the  
LCD.  
d Press Stop/Exit. Distinctive Ring is now  
„ The ID Unknown message means the  
call originated outside your Caller ID  
service area.  
set to on.  
7
Turning off Distinctive Ring  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose Off.  
c Press OK.  
7
„ The ID Withheld message means the  
caller has intentionally blocked  
transmission of information.  
You can print a list of the Caller ID information  
received by your machine. (See Printing the  
Caller ID List on page 58.)  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Note  
The Caller ID service varies with different  
carriers. Call your local telephone  
company to find out about the kind of  
service available in your area. This feature  
may not available in some countries.  
If you turn off Distinctive Ring, the  
machine will stay in Manual receive  
mode. You will need to set the receive  
Mode again. (See Choosing the receive  
mode on page 46.)  
57  
 
Chapter 7  
Viewing the Caller ID List  
7
Connecting an external  
TAD  
Your machine stores information for the last  
thirty calls in the Caller ID list. You can view  
or print this list. When the thirty-first call  
comes in to the machine, it replaces  
information about the first call.  
7
You can connect an external Telephone  
Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as  
your machine. When the TAD answers a call,  
your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax  
calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine.  
If it hears them it will take over the call and  
receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will  
let your TAD take a voice message and the  
display will show Telephone.  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.  
b Press a or b to choose Display#.  
Press OK.  
The Caller ID of the last call will appear  
on the display. If no ID is stored, the  
beeper will sound and No Caller ID  
will appear on the display.  
The external TAD must answer within four  
rings (we recommend you set it to two rings).  
This is because your machine cannot hear  
the CNG tones until the external TAD has  
picked up the call. The sending machine will  
send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds  
longer. We do not recommend using the toll  
saver feature on your external TAD if it needs  
more than four rings to activate it.  
c Press a or b to scroll through the Caller  
ID memory to choose the Caller ID you  
want to view, and then press OK.  
The LCD will show the caller's number  
and the date and time of the call.  
d To finish viewing, press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Printing the Caller ID List  
7
If you have problems receiving faxes,  
reduce the ring delay setting on your  
external TAD to one or two rings.  
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 3.  
b Press a or b to choose Print Report.  
Press OK.  
If no ID is stored, the beeper will sound  
and No Caller ID will appear on the  
LCD.  
c Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
d After printing has finished,  
press Stop/Exit.  
58  
   
Telephone and external devices  
Connections  
7
Recording an outgoing  
message (OGM)  
7
The external TAD must be connected as  
shown in the illustration below.  
a Record 5 seconds of silence at the  
beginning of your message. This allows  
your machine time to listen for fax tones.  
1
1
b Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
c End your 20-second message by giving  
your Remote Activation code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example:  
“After the beep, leave a message or  
press l51 (l91 for New Zealand) and  
Start to send a fax.”  
2
Note  
• You need to turn the Remote Codes  
setting to on to use the Fax Activation  
Code l51 (l91 for New Zealand). (See  
Using Remote Codes on page 61.)  
(Example forAustralia)  
7
1
2
TAD  
Protective Cap  
• We recommend beginning your OGM with  
an initial 5 second silence because the  
machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud  
voice. You may try leaving out this pause,  
but if your machine has trouble receiving  
faxes, then you should re-record the OGM  
to include it.  
a Set your external TAD to one or two  
rings. (The machine’s Ring Delay  
setting does not apply.)  
b Record the outgoing message on your  
external TAD.  
c Set the TAD to answer calls.  
Multi-line connections (PABX)  
7
d Set the Receive Mode to  
External TAD. (See Choosing the  
receive mode on page 46.)  
Most offices use a central telephone system.  
Brother recommends that all our Fax/MFC  
machines be connected to a discreet  
(dedicated) line. Although a particular PABX  
may appear to work with a particular model of  
fax machine, we cannot guarantee that the  
unit will operate correctly.  
While it is often relatively simple to connect a  
fax machine to a PABX (Private Automatic  
Branch Exchange), we suggest that you  
contact the company that installed your  
telephone system and ask them to connect  
the fax machine for you.  
Brother does not recommend the use of a  
PABX line. PABX limitations in general can  
cause some functions of the fax machine not  
to work correctly.  
59  
     
Chapter 7  
For Fax/Tel mode only  
7
External and extension  
telephones  
7
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will  
use the F/T Ring Time  
(pseudo/double-ringing) to alert you to pick  
up a voice call.  
Note  
You need to turn the Remote Codes  
setting to on to use the Remote Activation  
Code l51 (l91 for New Zealand) and  
Remote Deactivation Code #51 (#91 for  
New Zealand). (See Using Remote Codes  
on page 61.)  
Lift the external telephone’s handset, and  
then press Hook to answer.  
If you are at an extension telephone, you will  
need to lift the handset during the F/T Ring  
Time and then press #51 (#91 for New  
Zealand) between the pseudo/double rings. If  
no one is on the line, or if someone wants to  
send you a fax, send the call back to the  
machine by pressing l51 (l91 for New  
Zealand).  
Operation from external or  
extension telephones  
7
If you answer a fax call on an extension  
telephone, or an external telephone that is  
correctly connected to the machine through  
the T-piece connection, you can make your  
machine take the call by using the Remote  
Activation code. When you press the Remote  
Activation code l51 (l91 for New Zealand)  
the machine starts to receive the fax.  
Connecting an external or  
extension telephone  
7
You can connect a separate telephone  
directly to your machine as shown in the  
diagram below.  
If you answer a call and no one is on  
the line:  
1
2
7
You should assume that you’re receiving a  
manual fax.  
Press l51 (l91 for New Zealand) and wait for  
the chirp or until the LCD shows Receiving,  
and then hang up.  
Note  
You can also use the Fax Detect feature to  
make your machine take the call. (See  
Fax Detect on page 49.)  
3
(Example for Australia)  
1
2
3
Extension telephone  
External telephone  
Protective Cap  
When you are using an external telephone,  
the LCD shows Telephone.  
60  
         
Telephone and external devices  
Using a non-Brother cordless  
external handset  
Using Remote Codes  
7
7
Remote Activation Code  
7
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is  
connected to the telephone line cord (see  
page 60) and you typically carry the cordless  
handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer  
calls during the Ring Delay.  
If you answer a fax call on an external or  
extension telephone, you can tell your  
machine to receive it by pressing the Remote  
Activation Code l51 (l91 for New Zealand).  
Wait for the chirping sounds then replace the  
handset. (See Fax Detect on page 49.) Your  
caller will have to press start to send the fax.  
If you let the machine answer first, you will  
have to go to the machine so you can press  
Hook to transfer the call to the cordless  
handset.  
If you answer a fax call at the external  
telephone, you can make the machine  
receive the fax by pressing Start.  
Note  
• If you are always disconnected when  
accessing your external TAD remotely, try  
changing the Remote Activation Code and  
Remote Deactivation Code to another  
three-digit code using the numbers  
0-9, l, #.  
Remote Deactivation Code  
7
If you receive a voice call and the machine is  
in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T  
(double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you  
pick up the call on an extension telephone  
you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing #51  
(#91 for New Zealand) (make sure you press  
this between the rings).  
7
• Remote Codes might not work with some  
telephone systems.  
• Not all brands of cordless telephones are  
compatible for use with your machine.  
If the machine answers a voice call and  
pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you  
can take the call at the external telephone by  
pressing Hook.  
Turning on the Remote Codes  
7
You need to turn the Remote Codes setting to  
on to use the Remote Activation Code and  
Remote Deactivation Code.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 4.  
.
c Press a or b to choose On.  
Press OK.  
d If you do not want to change the Remote  
Activation Code, press OK.  
e If you do not want to change the Remote  
Deactivation Code, press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
61  
       
Chapter 7  
Changing the Remote Codes  
7
The preset Remote Activation Code is l51  
(l91 for New Zealand). The preset Remote  
Deactivation Code is #51 (#91 for New  
Zealand). If you are always disconnected  
when accessing your External TAD, try  
changing the three-digit remote codes, for  
example ### and 555.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 4.  
.
c Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
d If you chose On in step c, enter the new  
Remote Activation Code.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the new Remote Deactivation  
Code.  
Press OK.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
62  
   
Dialling and storing numbers  
8
8
Speed dialling  
8
How to dial  
8
You can dial in any of the following ways.  
Press  
(Address Book) and then the three  
digit Speed Dial number. (See Storing Speed  
Dial numbers on page 66.)  
Manual dialling  
8
Use the dial pad to enter all the digits of the  
telephone or fax number.  
Three-digit number  
Note  
If the LCD shows Register Now? when  
you enter a One Touch or a Speed Dial  
number, it means that a number is not  
stored there.  
8
One touch Dialling  
8
Press the One Touch key that stores the  
number you want to call. (See Storing  
One Touch Dial numbers on page 65.)  
Search  
8
You can search alphabetically for names you  
have stored in the One Touch and Speed Dial  
memories. (See Storing One Touch Dial  
numbers on page 65 and Storing Speed Dial  
numbers on page 66.)  
a Press  
(Address Book) twice.  
b Press the dial pad key for the first few  
letters of the name. (Use the chart on  
Entering text on page 213 to help you  
enter letters.)  
To dial One Touch numbers 5 to 8, hold down  
Shift as you press the One Touch key.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to scroll until you find the  
name you are looking for.  
Press OK.  
63  
             
Chapter 8  
d Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
Storing numbers  
8
Note  
You can set up your machine to do the  
following types of easy dialling: One Touch,  
Speed Dial and Groups for Broadcasting  
faxes. You can also specify the default  
resolution for each One Touch and Speed  
Dial number. When you dial a quick dial  
number, the LCD shows the name, if you  
stored it, or the number. A scan profile can  
also be stored along with the fax number.  
• If you do not enter a letter and press OK in  
step b, all registered names will appear.  
Press a or b to scroll until you find the  
name you are looking for.  
• If the LCD shows No Contact Found  
when you enter the first few letters of the  
name, it means that a name for the letter  
is not stored.  
If you lose electrical power, the quick dial  
numbers stored in the memory will not be lost  
because they are stored permanently.  
Fax redial  
8
A scan profile is the resolution and other scan  
settings that you choose when you store a  
number. For example, you will be asked to  
select Standard (Std), Fine, or Photo if you  
have selected the I-FAX option. Or, you will  
be asked to select B&W 200 dpi,  
If you are sending a fax automatically and the  
line is busy, the machine will automatically  
redial up to three times at five minute  
intervals.  
If you are sending a fax manually and the line  
is busy, press Redial/Pause, wait for the  
other fax machine to answer, and then press  
Mono Start or Colour Start to try again. If  
you want to make a second call to the last  
number dialled, you can save time by  
pressing Redial/Pause and Mono Start or  
Colour Start.  
B&W 200 × 100 dpi, Gray 100 dpi,  
Gray 200 dpi, Gray 300 dpi, Color 100 dpi,  
Color 200 dpi, Color 300 dpi or Color 600 dpi  
if you selected the E-Mail option. (I-FAX,  
Fax/Tel and E-mail options are available as a  
download.)  
Redial/Pause only works if you dialled from  
the control panel.  
Storing a pause  
8
Press Redial/Pause to insert a 3.5-second  
pause between numbers. You can press  
Redial/Pause as many times as needed to  
increase the length of the pause.  
64  
     
Dialling and storing numbers  
d If you want to save a fax resolution along  
with the number, choose one of the  
following:  
Storing One Touch Dial  
numbers  
8
„ To store the fax resolution, press a or  
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or  
Photo.  
Your machine has 4 One Touch keys where  
you can store 8 fax or telephone numbers for  
automatic dialling. To access numbers 5 to 8,  
hold down Shift as you press the One Touch  
key.  
Press OK.  
„ Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and  
E-mail options  
a Press the One Touch key where you  
want to store the number.  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?.  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
b Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail  
or IFAX.  
Press OK.  
a Press the One Touch key where you  
want to store the number.  
8
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?.  
c Choose one of the following:  
„ Enter the telephone or fax number  
(up to 20 characters) if you selected  
Fax/Tel.  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
b Enter the phone or fax number (up to  
20 characters).  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
„ Enter the E-mail address (up to  
60 characters) if you selected  
E-Mail or IFAX. Use the chart on  
Entering text on page 213 to help  
you enter letters.  
c Choose one of the following:  
„ Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
on Entering text on page 213 to help  
you enter letters.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
Note  
„ Press OK to store the number  
If you selected E-Mail and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Scan  
mode. If you selected IFAX and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Fax  
mode.  
without a name.  
65  
     
Chapter 8  
d Choose one of the following:  
Storing Speed Dial numbers  
8
„ Enter the name using the dial pad  
You can store your frequently used numbers  
as Speed Dial numbers, so that when you dial  
you will only have to press a few keys  
(up to 15 characters).  
Press OK.  
„ Press OK to store the number or  
(
(Address Book), the three-digit number  
E-mail address without a name.  
and Mono Start or Colour Start). The  
machine can store 200 Speed Dial numbers  
(001 - 200).  
e If you want to save a fax/scan resolution  
along with the number, choose one of  
the following:  
a Press (Address Book) and enter a  
„ If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine,  
S.Fine or Photo.  
three-digit Speed Dial location number  
(001-200).  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?.  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
Press OK.  
„ If you selected E-Mail in step b,  
press a or b to select Color100dpi,  
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,  
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,  
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,  
b Enter the phone or fax number (up to  
20 characters).  
Press OK.  
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.  
c Choose one of the following:  
Press OK and then go to step f.  
„ Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
on Entering text on page 213 to help  
you enter letters.  
„ If you selected IFAX in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine or  
Photo.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
„ Press OK if you don't want to change  
the default resolution.  
„ Press OK to store the number  
without a name.  
f If you selected Black & White in step e,  
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or  
Secure PDF (SPDF)) that will be used to  
send to your PC. If you selected Gray or  
Color in step e, select the file format  
(PDF, Secure PDF (SPDF), JPEG, or  
XPS) that will be used to send to your PC.  
Press OK.  
d If you want to save a fax resolution along  
with the number, choose one of the  
following:  
„ To store the fax resolution, press a or  
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or  
Photo.  
Press OK.  
Note  
„ Press OK if you don’t want to change  
• When you do a broadcast and you have  
saved a scan profile along with the  
number, the scan profile of the  
One Touch, Speed Dial or Group number  
you chose first will be applied to the  
broadcast.  
the default resolution.  
• You can also store the number by  
pressing Menu, 2, 3, 1.  
66  
       
Dialling and storing numbers  
If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and  
E-mail options  
e If you want to save a fax/scan resolution  
along with the number, choose one of  
the following:  
a Press  
(Address Book) and enter a  
three-digit Speed Dial location number  
(001-200).  
„ If you selected Fax/Tel in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine,  
S.Fine or Photo.  
If a number is not stored there, the LCD  
shows Register Now?.  
Press 1 to choose Yes.  
Press OK.  
„ If you selected E-Mail in step b,  
press a or b to select Color100dpi,  
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,  
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,  
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,  
b Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail  
or IFAX.  
Press OK.  
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.  
c Choose one of the following:  
Press OK and then go to step f.  
„ Enter the telephone or fax number  
(up to 20 characters) if you selected  
Fax/Tel.  
„ If you selected IFAX in step b,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine or  
Photo.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
„ Enter the E-mail address (up to  
60 characters) if you selected  
E-Mail or IFAX. Use the chart on  
Entering text on page 213 to help  
you enter letters.  
„ Press OK if you don't want to change  
the default resolution.  
8
f If you selected Black & White in step e,  
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or  
Secure PDF (SPDF)) that will be used to  
send to your PC. If you selected Gray or  
Color in step e, select the file format  
(PDF, Secure PDF (SPDF), JPEG, or  
XPS) that will be used to send to your  
PC.  
Press OK.  
Note  
If you selected E-Mail and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Scan  
mode. If you selected IFAX and save the  
E-mail address, you can only use the  
E-mail address when you are in Fax  
mode.  
Press OK.  
Note  
• When you do a broadcast and you have  
saved a scan profile along with the  
number, the scan profile of the  
One Touch, Speed Dial or Group number  
you chose first will be applied to the  
broadcast.  
d Choose one of the following:  
„ Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters).  
Press OK.  
• You can also store the number by  
„ Press OK to store the number or  
pressing Menu, 2, 3, 2.  
E-mail address without a name.  
67  
     
Chapter 8  
e If you want to save a fax resolution along  
with the number, choose one of the  
options below:  
Changing One Touch and  
Speed Dial numbers  
8
„ To store the fax resolution, press a or  
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or  
Photo.  
If you try to store a One Touch or Speed Dial  
number over an existing number, the LCD will  
show the name or number already stored  
there. If your machine has a scheduled job or  
you have set a fax forwarding number, the  
LCD will ask you if you want to change the  
number.  
Press OK.  
„ Press OK if you don’t want to change  
the default resolution.  
f Press Stop/Exit.  
a Do one of the following:  
If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and  
E-mail options  
„ To change a stored One Touch  
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 1.  
Press OK.  
a Do one of the following:  
„ To change a stored One Touch  
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 1.  
One Touch Dial  
Select One Touch  
Press OK.  
Choose the One Touch number you  
want to change.  
One Touch Dial  
Select One Touch  
„ To change a stored Speed Dial  
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 2.  
Choose the One Touch number you  
want to change.  
Press OK.  
„ To change a stored Speed Dial  
number, press Menu, 2, 3, 2.  
Speed Dial  
Speed Dial? #  
Press OK.  
Choose the Speed Dial number you  
want to change, then press OK.  
Speed Dial  
Speed Dial? #  
b Do one of the following:  
Choose the Speed Dial number you  
want to change then press OK.  
„ To change the stored number, press  
1.  
„ To exit without making a change,  
press 2.  
b Do one of the following:  
„ To change the stored number,  
press 1.  
#005:MIKE  
1.Change 2.Exit  
„ To exit without making a change,  
press 2.  
c Enter a new number or character.  
Press OK.  
#005:MIKE  
1.Change 2.Exit  
d Press d or c to position the cursor under  
the character you want to change, and  
then press Clear/Back to delete it.  
Repeat for each character you want to  
delete.  
c Press a or b to select Fax/Tel, E-Mail  
or IFAX.  
Press OK.  
68  
 
Dialling and storing numbers  
d Enter a new number or character.  
Press OK.  
Setting up Groups for  
Broadcasting  
8
e Press d or c to position the cursor under  
the character you want to change, and  
then press Clear/Back to delete it.  
Repeat for each character you want to  
delete.  
If you often want to send the same fax  
message to many fax numbers you can set  
up a group.  
Groups are stored on a One Touch key or a  
Speed Dial number. Each group uses up a  
One Touch key or a Speed Dial location. You  
can then send the fax message to all the  
numbers stored in a group just by pressing a  
One Touch key or entering a Speed Dial  
number, and then pressing Mono Start.  
f Follow the directions beginning in  
step e in Storing One-Touch dial  
numbers and Storing Speed-Dial  
numbers. (See Storing One Touch Dial  
numbers on page 65 and Storing Speed  
Dial numbers on page 66.)  
Before you can add numbers to a group, you  
need to store them as One Touch or Speed  
Dial numbers. You can have up to 20 small  
groups, or you can assign up to 207 numbers  
to one large group.  
a Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.  
b Choose the One Touch key or Speed  
Dial location where you want to store the  
group.  
8
„ Press a One Touch key.  
„ Press  
(Address Book) and then  
enter the three-digit Speed Dial  
location.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Please select a One Touch key or a  
Speed Dial number that has not been  
used to store a number.  
c Use the dial pad to enter a group  
number (01 to 20).  
Press OK.  
69  
     
Chapter 8  
d To add One Touch or Speed Dial  
If you downloaded I-FAX, Fax/Tel and  
E-mail options  
numbers follow the instructions below:  
„ For One Touch numbers, press the  
a Press Menu, 2, 3, 3.  
One Touch keys one after the other.  
b Choose an empty location where you  
want to store the group in one of the  
following ways:  
„ For Speed Dial numbers, press  
(Address Book) and then enter  
the three-digit Speed Dial location.  
„ Press a One Touch key.  
The LCD will display your chosen One  
Touch numbers with a l and Speed Dial  
numbers with a # (for example l006,  
#009).  
„ Press  
(Address Book) and then  
enter the three-digit Speed Dial  
location.  
Press OK.  
e Press OK when you have finished  
adding numbers.  
c Use the dial pad to enter a group  
number (01 to 20).  
f Do one of the following:  
Press OK.  
„ Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
on Entering text on page 213 to help  
you enter letters.  
d Press a or b to select Fax/IFAX or  
E-Mail.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
e To add One Touch or Speed Dial  
„ Press OK to store the group without  
numbers follow the instructions below:  
a name.  
„ For One Touch numbers, press the  
One Touch keys one after the other.  
g If you want to save a fax resolution along  
with the number, choose one of the  
options below:  
„ For Speed Dial numbers, press  
(Address Book) and then enter  
the three-digit Speed Dial location.  
„ To store the fax resolution, press a or  
b to select Std, Fine, S.Fine or  
Photo.  
The LCD will display your chosen One  
Touch numbers with a l and Speed Dial  
numbers with a # (for example l006,  
#009).  
Press OK.  
„ Press OK if you do not want to  
change the default resolution.  
f Press OK when you have finished  
adding numbers.  
h Do one of the following:  
„ To store another group for  
broadcasting, go to step b.  
g Do one of the following:  
„ Enter the name using the dial pad  
(up to 15 characters). Use the chart  
on Entering text on page 213 to help  
you enter letters.  
„ To finish storing groups for  
broadcasting, press Stop/Exit.  
Press OK.  
„ Press OK to store the group without  
a name.  
70  
 
Dialling and storing numbers  
h You can save a fax/scan resolution  
along with the number. Do one of the  
following:  
Combining quick dial  
numbers  
8
„ If you selected Fax/IFAX in step d,  
press a or b to select Std, Fine,  
S.Fine or Photo.  
You can combine more than one Quick Dial  
number when you dial. This feature may be  
useful if you need to dial an access code for  
a cheaper rate from another long distance  
carrier.  
Press OK.  
„ If you selected E-Mail in step d,  
press a or b to select Color100dpi,  
Color200dpi, Color300dpi,  
Color600dpi, Gray100dpi,  
Gray200dpi, Gray300dpi,  
For example, you might have stored ‘555’ on  
Speed Dial #003 and ‘7000’ on Speed Dial  
#002. You can use them both to dial  
‘555-7000’ if you press the following keys:  
B&W200dpi or B&W200x100.  
Press  
(Address Book), 003.  
Press OK.  
Press  
(Address Book), 002 and  
„ Press OK if you don't want to change  
Mono Start or Colour Start.  
the default resolution.  
Numbers can be added manually by entering  
them on the dial pad:  
Note  
If you have selected Fax/IFAX in step d  
and added One-Touch or Speed-Dial  
numbers that are stored as 'I-Fax', you  
cannot select S.Fine.  
Press  
(Address Book), 003, 7001 (on the  
dial pad), and Mono Start or Colour Start.  
8
This would dial ‘555–7001’. You can also add  
a pause by pressing Redial/Pause key.  
i If you selected Black & White in step h,  
select the file format (TIFF, PDF or  
Secure PDF (SPDF)) that will be used to  
send to your PC. If you selected Gray or  
Color in step h, select the file format  
(PDF, Secure PDF (SPDF), JPEG or  
XPS) that will be used to send to your  
PC.  
Tone or Pulse  
(not available in New Zealand)  
8
If you have a Pulse dialling service, but need  
to send Tone signals (for example, for  
telephone banking), follow the instructions  
below. If you have Touch Tone service, you  
Press OK.  
will not need this feature to send tone signals.  
Note  
a Press Hook.  
• Fax Broadcasting is for black & white only.  
b Press # on the machine’s control panel.  
Any digits dialled after this will send tone  
signals.  
• You can easily print a list of all your  
Speed-Dial numbers. Numbers that are  
part of a group will be marked in the Group  
column. (See Reports on page 83.)  
When you hang up, the machine will  
return to the Pulse dialling service.  
71  
     
Remote Fax Options  
(black & white only)  
9
9
Remote Fax Options ARE NOT available for  
colour fax.  
IMPORTANT  
If you choose Backup Print On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. The  
machine can store faxes for up to 60 hours  
if there is a power failure.  
Remote Fax Options let you receive faxes  
while you are away from the machine.  
You can use only one Remote Fax Option at  
a time.  
Fax Forwarding  
9
The Fax Forwarding feature lets you  
automatically forward your received faxes to  
another machine. If you choose Backup Print  
On, the machine will also print the fax.  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax Forward.  
Press OK.  
The LCD will ask you to enter the fax  
number you want your faxes to be  
forwarded to.  
c Enter the forwarding number (up to  
20 digits).  
Press OK.  
Note  
You can also enter an E-mail address if  
your machine has been configured for the  
Internet Fax feature. (For details about  
Internet Fax, see the Network User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM. For information  
about Fax Forward to E-mail, see the  
Brother Solutions Center at  
http://solutions.brother.com/.)  
d Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Press OK.  
Backup Print  
On  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
72  
   
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)  
Fax Storage  
9
PC Fax Receive  
9
The Fax Storage feature lets you store your  
received faxes in the machine’s memory. You  
can retrieve stored fax messages from a fax  
machine at another location using the remote  
retrieval commands. (See Retrieving fax  
messages on page 76.) Your machine will  
automatically print a copy of the stored fax.  
If you turn on the PC Fax Receive feature  
your MFC will store received faxes in memory  
and send them to your PC automatically. You  
can then use your PC to view and store these  
faxes.  
Even if you have turned off your PC (at night  
or the weekend, for example), your MFC will  
receive and store your faxes in its memory.  
The LCD will show the number of stored  
faxes received, for example:  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Fax Storage.  
Press OK.  
PC Fax Msg:001  
When you start your PC and the PC Fax  
Receiving software runs, your MFC transfers  
your faxes to your PC automatically.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
To transfer the received faxes to your PC you  
must have the PC-FAX Receiving software  
running on your PC. (For details, see PC-FAX  
receiving in the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
If Fax Storage is turned on your  
machine cannot receive a colour fax  
unless the sending machine converts it to  
black & white.  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
9
b Press a or b to choose  
PC Fax Receive.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose <USB> or your  
computer name if the machine is  
connected to a network.  
Press OK.  
d Press a or b to choose On or Off.  
Backup Print  
Off  
Press OK.  
73  
   
Chapter 9  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Changing Remote Fax  
Options  
9
IMPORTANT  
If you choose Backup Print On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. The  
machine can store faxes for up to 60 hours  
if there is a power failure.  
If received faxes are left in your machine’s  
memory when you change to another  
Remote Fax Option, the LCD will ask you the  
following message:  
Erase All Doc?  
1.Yes 2.No  
or  
Print All Fax?  
1.Yes 2.No  
Note  
• Before you can set up PC Fax Receive  
you must install the MFL-Pro Suite  
software on your PC. Make sure your PC  
is connected and turned on. (For details  
see PC-FAX receiving in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be  
erased or printed before the setting  
changes. If a backup copy has already  
been printed it will not be printed again.  
„ If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not  
be erased or printed and the setting will be  
unchanged.  
• If your machine has a problem and is  
unable to print faxes in memory, you can  
use this setting to transfer your faxes to a  
PC. (For details, see Error and  
If received faxes are left in the machine’s  
memory when you change to  
PC Fax Receive from another remote fax  
option (Fax Forward or Fax Storage),  
the LCD will ask you the following message:  
maintenance messages on page 142.)  
• PC Fax Receive is not supported in Mac  
OS. (See PC-FAX receiving in the  
Send Fax to PC?  
1.Yes 2.No  
Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ If you press 1, faxes in the memory will be  
sent to your PC before the setting  
changes.  
„ If you press 2, faxes in the memory will not  
be erased or transferred to your PC and  
the setting will be unchanged.  
IMPORTANT  
If you choose Backup Print On, the  
machine will also print the fax at your  
machine so you will have a copy. This is a  
safety feature in case there is a power  
failure before the fax is forwarded or a  
problem at the receiving machine. The  
machine can store faxes for up to 60 hours  
if there is a power failure.  
74  
   
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)  
Turning off Remote Fax  
Options  
Remote retrieval  
9
9
The remote retrieval feature lets you retrieve  
your stored fax messages when you are not  
at the machine. You can call your machine  
from any touch tone phone or fax machine,  
then use the Remote Access Code to retrieve  
your messages.  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose Off.  
Press OK.  
Note  
Setting a Remote Access  
Code  
The LCD will give you options if there are  
received faxes still in your machine’s  
memory. (See Changing Remote Fax  
Options on page 74.)  
9
The Remote Access Code feature lets you  
access the remote retrieval features when  
you are away from your machine. Before you  
use the remote access and retrieval features,  
you have to set up your own code. The  
default code is an inactive code: – – –l.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
a Press Menu, 2, 5, 2.  
b Enter a three-digit code using the  
numbers 0 – 9, l or #.  
Press OK.  
9
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
Do not use the same code used for your  
Remote Activation code (l51 (l91 for New  
Zealand)) or Remote Deactivation code  
(#51 (#91 for New Zealand)). (See  
Changing the Remote Codes  
on page 62.)  
You can change your code at any time. If you  
want to make your code inactive, press  
Clear/Back and OK in b to restore the  
default setting – – –l.  
75  
       
Chapter 9  
Using your Remote Access  
Code  
Retrieving fax messages  
9
9
a Dial your fax number from a telephone  
or another fax machine using touch  
tone.  
a Dial your fax number from a telephone  
or another fax machine using touch  
tone.  
b When your machine answers, during a  
period of silence enter your Remote  
Access Code (3 digits followed by l). If  
you hear one long beep, you have  
messages.  
b When your machine answers, during a  
period of silence enter your Remote  
Access Code.  
c The machine signals if it has received  
c When you hear two short beeps, use the  
dial pad to press 9 6 2.  
messages:  
„ No beeps  
d Wait for a long beep, and then use the  
dial pad to enter the number of the  
remote fax machine where you want  
your fax messages sent, followed by ##  
(up to 20 digits).  
No messages received.  
„ 1 long beep  
Fax message received.  
d The machine gives two short beeps to  
tell you to enter a command. The  
machine will hang up if you wait longer  
than 30 seconds before entering a  
command. If you enter an invalid  
command the machine will beep three  
times.  
e Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep. Your machine will call the other  
machine, which will then print your fax  
messages.  
Note  
You can insert a pause in a fax number by  
using the # key.  
e Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you  
have finished.  
f Hang up.  
Note  
• If your machine is set to Manual mode,  
you can still access the remote retrieval  
features. Dial the fax number as normal  
and let the machine ring. After  
100 seconds you will hear a long beep to  
tell you to enter the remote access code.  
You will then have 30 seconds to enter the  
code.  
• This function may not available in some  
countries e.g. Australia.  
76  
     
Remote Fax Options (black & white only)  
Changing the Fax Forwarding  
number  
9
You can change the default setting of your fax  
forwarding number from another telephone or  
fax machine using touch tone.  
a Dial your fax number from a telephone  
or another fax machine using touch  
tone.  
b When your machine answers, enter  
your Remote Access Code (3 digits  
followed by l) during a period of silence.  
If you hear one long beep, you have  
messages.  
c When you hear two short beeps, use the  
dial pad to press 9 5 4.  
d Wait for a long beep, and then use the  
dial pad to enter the new number of the  
remote fax machine where you want  
your fax messages forwarded followed  
by ## (up to 20 digits).  
9
e Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you  
have finished.  
f Hang up after you hear your machine  
beep.  
Note  
You can insert a pause in a fax number by  
using the # key.  
77  
   
Chapter 9  
Remote fax commands  
9
Follow the commands below to access features when you are away from the machine. When you  
call the machine and enter your Remote Access Code (3 digits followed by l), the system will give  
two short beeps and you must enter a remote command.  
Remote commands  
95 Change the fax forwarding or  
Operation details  
fax storage settings  
1 OFF  
You can choose Off after you have retrieved or erased all your  
messages.  
2 Fax Forwarding  
4 Fax Forwarding number  
6 Fax Storage  
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three  
short beeps, you cannot change because the conditions have  
not been met (for example, registering a fax forwarding  
number). You can register the maximum number of rings. (See  
Changing the Fax Forwarding number on page 77.) Once you  
have registered the number, fax forwarding will work.  
96  
Retrieve a fax  
2 Retrieve all faxes  
Enter the number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax  
messages. (See Retrieving fax messages on page 76.)  
3 Erase faxes from the memory  
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased  
from the memory.  
97  
98  
Check the receiving status  
1 Fax  
You can check whether your machine has received any faxes.  
If yes, you will hear one long beep. If no, you will hear three  
short beeps.  
Change the Receive Mode  
1 External TAD  
2 Fax/Tel  
If you hear one long beep, your change has been accepted.  
3 Fax Only  
90  
Exit  
Press 9 0 to exit remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then  
replace the handset.  
78  
 
Polling  
10  
10  
Polling lets you set up your machine so other  
people can receive faxes from you, but they  
pay for the call. It also lets you call somebody  
else’s fax machine and receive a fax from it,  
so you pay for the call. The polling feature  
needs to be set up on both machines for this  
to work. Not all fax machines support polling.  
Delayed polling  
10  
Delayed polling lets you set the machine to  
begin polling receive at a later time. You can  
only set up one delayed polling operation.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.  
.
Polling receive  
10  
c Press a or b to choose Timer.  
Press OK.  
Polling receive lets you call another fax  
machine to receive a fax.  
d Enter the time (in 24-hour format) you  
want to begin polling.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.  
.
For example, enter 21:45 for 9:45 PM.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose Standard.  
Press OK.  
e Enter the fax number you are polling.  
Press Start.  
The machine makes the polling call at  
the time you entered.  
d Enter the fax number you are polling.  
Press Start.  
Note  
Secure polling  
10  
If the other fax machine that you are calling  
has not been set-up for Polling, you will  
receive the message Connection Fail.  
10  
Secure polling lets you restrict who can get  
the documents you set up to be polled.  
Secure polling only works with Brother fax  
machines. If you want to get a fax from a  
secured Brother machine you have to enter  
the secure code.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.  
.
c Press a or b to choose Secure.  
Press OK.  
d Enter a four-digit secure code.  
Press OK.  
This is the security code of the fax  
machine you are polling.  
e Enter the fax number you are polling.  
f Press Start.  
79  
       
Chapter 10  
Sequential polling  
10  
Polled transmit  
(black & white only)  
10  
Sequential polling lets you request  
documents from several fax machines in one  
operation.  
Polled transmit lets you set up your machine  
to wait with a document so another fax  
machine can call and retrieve it.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
b Press Menu, 2, 1, 8.  
.
Setup for polled transmit  
10  
c Press a or b to choose Standard,  
Secure or Timer.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
Press OK.  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 6.  
d Choose one of the options below.  
„ If you choose Standard go to  
step e.  
d Press a or b to choose Standard.  
Press OK.  
„ If you choose Secure, enter a  
four-digit number, press OK, go to  
step e.  
e Press 2 to choose 2.No if you do not  
want to enter more settings when the  
„ If you chose Timer, enter the time  
(in 24-hours format) you want to  
begin polling and press OK, go to  
step e.  
LCD asks you the following message:  
Next  
1.Yes 2.No  
f Press Start.  
Note  
If you did not enter the correct Secure  
Code, you will receive the message  
Disconnected.  
g If you are using the scanner glass, the  
LCD will prompt you to choose one of  
the options below:  
Next Page?  
1.Yes 2.No(Send)  
e Specify the destination fax machines  
you want to poll by using One Touch,  
Speed Dial, Search, a Group or the dial  
pad. You must press OK between each  
location.  
„ Press 1 to send another page.  
Go to step h.  
„ Press 2 or Start to send the  
document.  
f Press Start.  
Press Stop/Exit while the machine is dialling  
to cancel the polling process.  
To cancel all sequential polling receive jobs,  
press Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and  
cancelling waiting jobs on page 45.)  
80  
         
Polling  
h Place the next page on the scanner  
glass, press OK. Repeat steps g and  
h for each additional page.  
h If you use the scanner glass, the LCD  
will prompt you to choose one of the  
options below:  
The document will be stored in memory  
until it is polled.  
Next Page?  
1.Yes 2.No(Send)  
„ Press 1 to send another page.  
Go to step i.  
Note  
The document will be stored and can be  
retrieved from any other fax machine until  
you delete the fax from memory.  
„ Press 2 or Start to send the  
document.  
To delete the fax from memory, press  
Menu, 2, 7. (See Checking and cancelling  
waiting jobs on page 45.)  
i Place the next page on the scanner  
glass, press OK. Repeat steps h and  
i for each additional page.  
Set Next Page  
Then Press OK  
Setup for polled transmit with  
a secure code  
10  
Your machine will automatically send  
the fax.  
Secure polling lets you restrict who can get  
the documents you set up to be polled.  
Secure polling only works with Brother fax  
machines. If another person wants to retrieve  
a fax from your machine they will have to  
enter the secure code.  
a Make sure you are in Fax mode  
.
10  
b Load your document.  
c Press Menu, 2, 2, 6.  
d Press a or b to choose Secure.  
Press OK.  
e Enter a four-digit number.  
Press OK.  
f Press 2 to choose 2.No if you do not  
want to enter more settings when the  
LCD asks you the following message:  
Next  
1.Yes 2.No  
g Press Start.  
81  
       
Printing reports  
11  
11  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Fax reports  
11  
Note  
You need to set up the Transmission  
Verification Report and Journal Period using  
the Menu keys.  
• If you choose On+Image or Off+Image,  
the image will only appear on the  
Transmission Verification Report if Real  
Time Transmission is set to Off. (See  
Real Time Transmission on page 43.)  
Transmission verification  
report  
11  
• If your transmission is successful, OK will  
appear next to RESULT on the  
You can use the Transmission Verification  
Report as proof that you sent a fax. This  
report lists the receiving party’s name or fax  
number, the time and date of transmission,  
duration of transmission, number of pages  
sent, and whether or not the transmission  
was successful.  
Transmission Verification Report. If  
transmission is not successful, ERROR will  
appear next to RESULT.  
There are several settings available for the  
Transmission Verification Report:  
„ On: Prints a report after every fax you  
send.  
„ On+Image: Prints a report after every fax  
you send. A portion of the fax’s first page  
appears on the report.  
„ Off: Prints a report if your fax is  
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.  
Off is the default setting.  
„ Off+Image: Prints a report if your fax is  
unsuccessful due to a transmission error.  
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on  
the report.  
a Press Menu, 2, 4, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose On, On+Image,  
Off or Off+Image.  
Press OK.  
82  
     
Printing reports  
Fax Journal  
11  
Reports  
11  
You can set the machine to print a fax journal  
(activity report) at specific intervals (every  
50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days). The  
default setting is Every 50 Faxes, this  
means that your machine will print the journal  
when the machine has stored 50 jobs.  
The following reports are available:  
1 XMIT Verify  
Displays the Transmission Verification  
Report for your last outgoing 200 faxes  
and prints the last report.  
If you set the interval to Off, you can still print  
the report by following the steps on the next  
page.  
2 Help List  
Prints a list of commonly used functions to  
help you program your machine.  
a Press Menu, 2, 4, 2.  
3 Tel Index List  
Prints a list of names and numbers stored  
in the One Touch and Speed Dial memory  
in numerical or alphabetical order.  
b Press a or b to choose an interval.  
Press OK.  
If you choose 7 days, you will be asked  
to choose a day when you want the  
7 day countdown to begin.  
If you choose Every 50 Faxes, the  
LCD shows Accepted. Then go to  
step d.  
4 Fax Journal  
Prints a list of information about your last  
200 incoming and outgoing faxes.  
(TX: transmit.) (RX: receive.)  
5 User Settings  
c Enter the time to begin printing, in  
24 hour format.  
Print a list of your current settings.  
6 Network Config  
Lists your network settings.  
7 Order Form  
For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.  
Press OK.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
You can print an accessories order form to  
fill out and send to your Brother dealer.  
If you choose 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, the  
machine will print the report at the selected  
time and then erase all jobs from its memory.  
If the machine’s memory becomes full with  
200 jobs before the time you chose has  
passed, the machine will print the journal  
early and then erase all jobs from memory.  
11  
If you want an extra report before it is due to  
print, you can print it manually without erasing  
the jobs from memory.  
83  
         
Chapter 11  
How to print a report  
11  
MFC-9320CW:  
a Press Menu, 6.  
b Do one of the following:  
„ Press a or b to choose the report you  
want.  
Press OK.  
„ Enter the number of the report you  
want to print. For example, press 2 to  
print the Help List.  
c Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
MFC-9120CN:  
a Press Reports.  
b Do one of the following:  
„ Press a or b to choose the report you  
want.  
Press OK.  
„ Enter the number of the report you  
want to print. For example, press 2 to  
print the Help List.  
c Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
84  
 
Section III  
Copy  
III  
Making copies  
86  
 
Making copies  
12  
12  
Making multiple copies  
12  
How to copy  
12  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
Entering copy mode  
12  
Press  
(Copy) to enter Copy mode.  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
Stack C o pie s :01  
Auto  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
Note  
1
2
3
4
5
Stack/Sort  
• To sort your copies, see Sorting copies  
using the ADF on page 89.  
Copy ratio and Copy layout  
Contrast  
• If the LCD shows "Please Wait" and the  
machine stops copying while you are  
making multiple copies, please wait for  
30 to 40 seconds until the machine  
finishes the colour registrations and  
cleaning process of the belt unit.  
Quality  
Number of copies  
Making a single copy  
12  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
.
Stop copying  
12  
b Load your document in the ADF or on  
To stop copying, press Stop/Exit.  
the scanner glass.  
c Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
86  
           
Making copies  
To enlarge or reduce the next copy follow the  
instructions below:  
Copy options  
(temporary settings)  
12  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
When you want to quickly change the copy  
settings temporarily for the next copy, use the  
temporary Copy keys. You can use different  
combinations.  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Enlarge/Reduce.  
e Do one of the following:  
The machine returns to its default settings  
one minute after copying, unless you have  
set the Mode Timer to 30 seconds or less.  
(See Mode Timer on page 24.)  
„ Press a or b to choose the  
enlargement or reduction ratio you  
want.  
Press OK.  
„ Press a or b to choose  
Custom(25-400%).  
Enlarging or reducing the  
image copied  
12  
Press OK.  
You can choose the following enlargement or  
reduction ratios:  
Use the dial pad to enter an  
enlargement or reduction ratio from  
25% to 400%. (For example, press  
Press  
100%*  
53%  
5 3 to enter  
.)  
97% LTRiA4  
94% A4iLTR  
91% Full Page  
85% LTRiEXE  
83% LGLiA4  
78% LGLiLTR  
70% A4iA5  
50%  
Press OK.  
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
Note  
• Page Layout Options 2 in 1(P), 2 in 1(L),  
4 in 1(P) or 4 in 1(L) are not available with  
Enlarge/Reduce.  
12  
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means  
Landscape.  
Custom(25-400%)  
200%  
141% A5iA4  
104% EXEiLTR  
* The factory setting is shown in Bold with an  
asterisk.  
Custom(25-400%) allows you to enter a  
ratio from 25% to 400% in 1% increments.  
87  
   
Chapter 12  
Using the Options key  
12  
Use the Options key to quickly set the following copy settings temporarily for the next copy.  
Press  
Menu selections  
Options  
Page  
Press a or b, then press OK  
Press a or b, then press OK  
Stack/Sort  
Stack*  
89  
90  
(appears when the document Sort  
is in the ADF)  
Brightness  
b -onnnn+ a  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnnno+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnnno+ a  
Off(1 in 1)*  
2 in 1 (P)  
2 in 1 (L)  
4 in 1 (P)  
4 in 1 (L)  
Contrast  
89  
90  
Page Layout  
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
88  
 
Making copies  
Improving copy quality  
12  
Sorting copies using the ADF  
12  
You can choose from a range of quality  
settings. The default setting is Auto.  
You can sort multiple copies. Pages will be  
stacked in the order 1 2 3, 1 2 3, 1 2 3, and so  
on.  
„ Auto  
Auto is the recommended mode for  
ordinary printouts. Suitable for documents  
that contain both text and photographs.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document in the ADF.  
.
„ Photo  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
Suitable for copying photographs.  
copies (up to 99).  
„ Text  
d Press Options. Press a or b to choose  
Suitable for documents containing only  
text.  
Stack/Sort.  
Press OK.  
To temporarily change the quality setting,  
follow the steps below:  
e Press a or b to choose Stackor Sort.  
Press OK.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
Adjusting Contrast, Colour  
and Brightness  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
12  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Quality.  
Contrast  
12  
e Press a or b to choose Auto, Photoor  
Adjust the contrast to help an image look  
sharper and more vivid.  
Text.  
Press OK.  
To temporarily change the contrast setting,  
follow the steps below:  
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
To change the default setting, follow the  
steps below:  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
12  
a Press Menu, 3, 1.  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
b Press a or b to choose the copy quality.  
Press OK.  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Options.  
Press a or b to choose Contrast.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
e Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
contrast.  
Press OK.  
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
89  
           
Chapter 12  
To change the default setting follow the steps  
below:  
Colour saturation  
12  
You can change the default setting for colour  
saturation.  
a Press Menu, 3, 3.  
To change the default setting follow the steps  
below:  
b Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
contrast.  
Press OK.  
a Press Menu, 3, 4.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
b Press a or b to choose 1.Red,  
2.Green, or 3.Blue.  
Press OK.  
Brightness  
12  
Adjust the copy brightness to make copies  
darker or lighter.  
c Press a or b to increase or decrease the  
colour saturation.  
Press OK.  
To temporarily change the copy brightness  
setting, follow the steps below:  
d Return to step b to choose the next  
colour. Or press Stop/Exit.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
Making N in 1 copies  
(page layout)  
12  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
You can reduce the amount of paper used  
when copying by using the N in 1 copy  
feature. This allows you to copy two or four  
pages onto one page, which lets you save  
paper.  
d Press Options.  
Press a or b to choose Brightness.  
Press OK.  
e Press a to make a lighter copy or press  
b to make a darker copy.  
Press OK.  
IMPORTANT  
• Please make sure the paper size is set to  
Letter, A4, Legalor Folio.  
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
To change the default setting follow the steps  
• (P) means Portrait and (L) means  
Landscape.  
below:  
• You cannot use the Enlarge/Reduce  
setting with the N in 1 feature.  
a Press Menu, 3, 2.  
b Press a to make a lighter copy or press  
b to make a darker copy.  
Press OK.  
a Make sure you are in Copy mode  
b Load your document.  
.
c Press Stop/Exit.  
c Use the dial pad to enter the number of  
copies (up to 99).  
d Press Options. Press a or b to choose  
Page Layout. Press OK.  
90  
           
Making copies  
e Press a or b to choose 2 in 1 (P),  
2 in 1 (L), 4 in 1 (P),  
4 in 1 (L)or Off(1 in 1).  
Press OK.  
If you are copying from the scanner  
glass:  
12  
Insert your document face down in the  
direction shown below:  
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
scan the page.  
„ 2 in 1 (P)  
If you placed the document in the ADF,  
the machine scans the pages and starts  
printing.  
If you are using the scanner glass, go  
to step g.  
„ 2 in 1 (L)  
g After the machine scans the page,  
press 1 to scan the next page.  
„ 4 in 1 (P)  
„ 4 in 1 (L)  
Next Page?  
1.Yes 2.No  
h Put the next page on the scanner glass.  
Press OK.  
Repeat steps g and h for each page of  
the layout.  
i After all the pages have been scanned,  
press 2 in step g to finish.  
If you are copying from the ADF:  
12  
Insert your document face up in the direction  
shown below:  
„ 2 in 1 (P)  
12  
„ 2 in 1 (L)  
„ 4 in 1 (P)  
„ 4 in 1 (L)  
91  
     
Chapter 12  
Out of memory  
message  
12  
If the memory becomes full while you are  
making copies, the LCD message will guide  
you through the next step.  
If you get an Out of Memorymessage  
while scanning a subsequent page, you will  
have the option to press Mono Start or  
Colour Start to copy the pages scanned so  
far, or to press Stop/Exit to cancel the  
operation.  
To gain extra memory, you can do the  
following:  
„ Print the faxes that are in the memory.  
(See Printing a fax from the memory  
on page 51.)  
„ You can turn off Fax Storage. (See  
Turning off Remote Fax Options  
on page 75.)  
„ Add optional memory. (See Memory  
board on page 123.)  
Note  
When you get an Out of Memory  
message, you may be able to make  
copies if you first print any incoming faxes  
in the memory to restore the memory to  
100%.  
92  
 
Section IV  
Direct printing  
IV  
Printing photos from a digital camera  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
94  
99  
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
 
Printing photos from a digital  
camera (MFC-9320CW only)  
13  
13  
Using PictBridge  
13  
Setting your digital camera  
13  
Make sure your camera is in PictBridge  
mode. The following PictBridge settings may  
Your Brother machine supports the  
PictBridge standard, allowing you to connect  
to and print photos directly from any  
PictBridge compatible digital camera.  
be available from the LCD of your PictBridge  
compatible camera. Depending on your  
camera some of these settings may not be  
available.  
Even if your camera is not in PictBridge mode  
or does not support PictBridge, you can  
connect your camera as a normal storage  
device. This enables you to print photos from  
your camera. Follow the steps for “Printing  
data from a USB Flash memory drive  
(MFC-9320CW only) on page 99”.  
„ Copies  
„ Qualities  
„ Paper size  
„ Date print  
„ File name print  
„ Layout (1 in 1 printing/Index printing only)  
Before using  
PictBridge  
Note  
The names and availability of each setting  
depends on the specification of your  
camera.  
13  
PictBridge requirements  
13  
You can also set the following PictBridge  
settings by using the control panel.  
To avoid errors, remember the following  
points:  
„ The machine and the digital camera must  
Menu selections  
Options  
be connected using a suitable USB cable.  
Paper Size  
Letter, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6  
„ The image file must be taken with the  
digital camera you want to connect to the  
machine.  
Portrait, Landscape 1  
Off, On  
Orientation  
Date & Time  
File Name  
Off, On  
Print Quality  
Normal, Fine  
1
If you choose the paper size Letter, A4 or B5, Portrait  
will be chosen. If you choose A5, B6 or A6,  
Landscape will be chosen.  
94  
             
Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9320CW only)  
a Press Menu, 5, 3.  
Printing images  
13  
USB Direct I/F  
3.PictBridge  
a Make sure that your camera is turned  
off. Connect your camera to the USB  
b To set the PictBridge settings, press a or  
b to choose 1.Paper Size,  
direct interface (1) on the front of the  
machine using a suitable USB cable.  
2.Orientation, 3.Date & Time,  
4.File Name, or 5.Print Quality.  
Press OK.  
c Press a or b to choose an option for  
each menu setting.  
1
Press OK.  
Repeat b to c for each PictBridge  
setting.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
b Turn on the camera. Make sure your  
camera is in PictBridge mode.  
• Camera settings are prioritized as long as  
your camera is not set to use your  
machine’s settings (default settings). If  
your camera is set to use your machine’s  
settings, the machine will print your photo  
using the settings below.  
When the machine has recognized the  
camera, the LCD shows the following  
message depending on which mode the  
machine is in:  
04/20 15:30 Fax  
Camera Connected  
Machine settings  
Paper Size  
Default settings  
A4  
Scan:Select ab  
Camera Connected  
Orientation  
Portrait  
Off  
Date & Time  
File Name  
Stack Copies:01  
Camera Connected  
Off  
Print Quality  
Normal  
c Set your camera to print an image. Set  
• Please refer to the documentation  
supplied with your camera for more  
detailed information on changing  
PictBridge settings.  
the number of copies if you are asked.  
When the machine starts printing an  
image, the LCD shows the following  
message:  
13  
PictBridge  
Printing. Kee...  
Note  
Please refer to the documentation  
supplied with your camera for detailed  
operations how to print using PictBridge.  
95  
     
Chapter 13  
Printing images with  
Secure Function  
Lock 2.0 enabled  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
IMPORTANT  
• To prevent damage to your machine, do  
not connect any device other than a digital  
camera or USB flash memory drive to the  
USB direct interface.  
13  
• DO NOT remove the digital camera from  
the USB direct interface until the machine  
has finished printing.  
For more information about Secure Function  
Lock 2.0, see Chapter 11 of the Network  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM we have  
supplied.  
DPOF printing  
13  
a Make sure that your camera is turned  
off. Connect your camera to the USB  
direct interface (1) on the front of the  
printer using a suitable USB cable.  
DPOF stands for Digital Print Order Format.  
Major digital camera manufacturers (Canon  
Inc., Eastman Kodak Company, FUJIFILM  
Corporation, Panasonic Corporation and  
Sony Corporation) created this standard to  
make it easier to print images from a digital  
camera.  
1
If your digital camera supports DPOF  
printing, you will be able to choose on the  
digital camera display the images and  
number of copies you want to print.  
The following DPOF settings are available.  
„ 1 in 1 printing  
b Turn on the camera. Make sure your  
camera is in PictBridge mode.  
When the machine has recognized the  
camera, the LCD shows the following  
message.  
„ Copies  
Access Denied  
c Press a or b to choose ID. Press OK.  
96  
   
Printing photos from a digital camera (MFC-9320CW only)  
d Enter the password. Press OK.  
f Set your camera to print an image. Set  
the number of copies if you are asked.  
When the machine starts printing an  
image, the LCD will show the following  
message:  
Change ID  
PIN:XXXX  
Note  
PictBridge  
Printing. Kee...  
If your ID has restricted options, the  
following messages appear on the LCD.  
Note  
Message  
Meaning  
Please refer to the documentation  
supplied with your camera for detailed  
operations how to print using PictBridge.  
Access Denied  
Printing documents  
directly from a camera to  
the Brother machine is  
restricted.  
Limit Exceeded  
The number of pages you  
are allowed to print is  
exceeded. The print job  
will be cancelled.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT remove the digital camera from  
the USB direct interface until the printer  
has finished printing.  
Mono Print Only Printing colour  
documents is restricted.  
Not Available  
Printing pictures directly  
from a camera to the  
Brother machine is  
restricted.  
e The LCD shows the following message  
depending on which mode the machine  
is in:  
04/20 15:30 Fax  
Camera Connected  
Scan:Select ab  
Camera Connected  
Stack Copies:01  
Camera Connected  
13  
97  
Chapter 13  
Connecting a camera  
as a storage device  
Understanding the  
error messages  
13  
13  
Even if your camera is not in PictBridge  
mode, or does not support PictBridge, you  
can connect your camera as a normal  
storage device. This enables you to print  
photos from your camera.  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you are using the  
PictBridge, you can easily identify and  
troubleshoot any problems.  
„ Out of Memory  
Follow the steps in Printing data directly from  
the USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9320CW  
only) on page 100.  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine's memory.  
(If you would like to print photos in PictBridge  
mode, see Setting your digital camera  
on page 94.)  
„ Unusable Device  
This message will appear if you connect  
an incompatible or broken device to the  
USB direct interface. To clear the error,  
unplug the device from the USB direct  
interface.  
Note  
The name of the storage mode and  
operation differs among digital cameras.  
Please refer to the documentation  
supplied with your camera for detailed  
information, such as how to switch from  
PictBridge mode to mass storage mode.  
(For more detailed solutions, see Error and  
maintenance messages on page 142.)  
98  
     
Printing data from a USB Flash  
memory drive (MFC-9320CW only)  
14  
14  
With the Direct Print feature, you do not need  
a computer to print data. You can print by just  
plugging your USB Flash memory drive into  
the machine’s USB direct interface.  
Creating a PRN or  
PostScript® 3™ file for  
direct printing  
14  
Note  
Some USB Flash memory drives may not  
work with the machine.  
Note  
The screens in this section may vary  
depending on your application and  
operating system.  
Supported file formats  
14  
a From the menu bar of an application,  
click File, then Print.  
Direct Print supports the following file  
formats:  
b ChooseBrotherMFC-XXXX Printer (1)  
and check the Print to file box (2).  
Click Print.  
„ PDF version 1.7 1  
„ JPEG  
„ Exif + JPEG  
1
2
„ PRN (created by Brother driver)  
„ TIFF (scanned by all MFC or DCP Brother  
models)  
„ PostScript® 3™ (created by the Brother  
BRScript3 printer driver)  
„ XPS version 1.0  
1
PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a  
JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not  
supported.  
c Choose the folder you want to save the  
file to and enter the file name if you are  
prompted to.  
If you are prompted for a file name only,  
you can also specify the folder you want  
to save the file in by entering the  
directory name. For example:  
14  
C:\Temp\FileName.prn  
If you have a USB Flash memory drive  
or digital camera connected to your  
computer, you can save the file directly  
to the USB Flash memory drive.  
99  
       
Chapter 14  
c Do one of the following:  
Printing data directly  
from the USB Flash  
memory drive  
„ Press a or b to choose a setting you  
need to change and press OK, and  
then press a or b to choose an option  
for the setting and press OK.  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
14  
„ If you do not need to change the  
current default settings, go to  
step d.  
a Connect your USB Flash memory drive  
to the USB direct interface (1) on the  
front of the machine.  
Print File Set  
The Direct key will light up. Press  
Direct. Your machine will enter Direct  
Print Mode.  
Paper Size  
e
Note  
• You can choose the following settings:  
Paper Size  
Media Type  
Multiple Page  
Orientation  
1
Collate  
Print Quality  
PDF Option  
• Depending on the file type, some of  
these settings may not appear.  
b Press a or b to choose the folder name  
or file name you want to print.  
Press OK.  
d Press Mono Start or Colour Start if  
you have finished.  
If you have chosen the folder name,  
press a or b to choose the file name you  
want to print.  
e Press the dial pad key to enter the  
number of copies you want.  
Press OK.  
Press OK.  
Direct Print  
1.FILE_1.PDF  
Copies  
=
1
Note  
• If you want to print an index of the files,  
choose Index Print, and then press  
OK. Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
print the data.  
• File names that are stored in your USB  
Flash memory drive can be displayed the  
following characters on the LCD: A B C D  
E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X  
Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ` - @ { } ~ ! #  
( ) & _ ^  
100  
   
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9320CW only)  
f Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
print the data.  
Printing data directly  
from the USB flash  
memory drive with  
Secure Function  
Lock 2.0 enabled  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
IMPORTANT  
• To prevent damage to your machine, DO  
NOT connect any device other than a  
digital camera or USB Flash memory drive  
to the USB direct interface.  
14  
• DO NOT remove the USB Flash memory  
drive or digital camera from the USB direct  
interface until the machine has finished  
printing.  
For more information about Secure Function  
Lock 2.0, see Chapter 11 of the Network  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM we have  
supplied.  
Note  
a Connect your USB Flash memory drive  
to the USB direct interface (1) on the  
front of the machine.  
You can change the default settings for  
Direct Print by using the control panel  
when the machine is not in the Direct Print  
mode. Press Menu, 5 to enter the  
USB Direct I/Fmenu. (See Entering  
text on page 213.)  
The Direct key will light up. Press  
Direct. Your machine will enter Direct  
Print Mode.  
1
b The following message appears if  
Secure Function Lock is on.  
Access Denied  
14  
c Press a or b to choose ID. Press OK.  
101  
 
Chapter 14  
d Enter the password. Press OK.  
Note  
Change ID  
PIN:XXXX  
• If you want to print an index of the files,  
choose Index Print, and then press  
OK. Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
print the data.  
Note  
If your ID has the restricted options, the  
following messages appear on the LCD.  
• File names containing more than  
8 characters will appear on the LCD as the  
first 6 characters of the file name followed  
by a tilde mark (~) and a number.  
For example, “HOLIDAY2007.JPG” would  
appear as “HOLIDA~1.JPG”.  
Message  
Meaning  
Access Denied  
Printing documents  
directly from the USB  
flash memory drive to the  
Brother machine is  
restricted.  
Only the following characters can be  
displayed on the LCD:  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T  
U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $ % ’ ` - @  
{ } ~ ! # ( ) & _ ^  
Limit Exceeded  
No Permission  
The number of pages you  
are allowed to print is  
exceeded. The print job  
will be cancelled.  
f Do one of the following:  
You have attempted to  
print in colour using an ID  
that is restricted to mono  
printing only. The print job  
will be cancelled.  
„ Press a or b to choose a setting you  
need to change and press OK, and  
then press a or b to choose an option  
for the setting and press OK.  
Mono Print Only Appears at log in for  
users who are restricted  
„ If you do not need to change the  
current default settings, go to  
step g.  
to mono printing only.  
Not Available  
Printing pictures directly  
from the USB Flash  
memory drive to the  
Brother machine is  
restricted.  
Print File Set  
Paper Size  
e
Note  
• You can choose the following settings:  
e The file names appear if the password is  
correct.  
Paper Size  
Press a or b to choose the folder name  
or file name you want to print.  
Press OK.  
If you have chosen the folder name,  
press a or b to choose the file name you  
want to print.  
Media Type  
Multiple Page  
Orientation  
Collate  
Print Quality  
PDF Option  
Press OK.  
Direct Print  
1.FILE_1.PDF  
• Depending on the file type, some of  
these settings may not appear.  
g Press Mono Start or Colour Start if  
you have finished.  
102  
 
Printing data from a USB Flash memory drive (MFC-9320CW only)  
h Press the dial pad key to enter the  
Understanding the  
error messages  
number of copies you want.  
Press OK.  
14  
Copies  
Once you are familiar with the types of errors  
that can occur while you print data from the  
USB Flash memory drive with Direct Print,  
you can easily identify and troubleshoot any  
problems.  
=
1
i Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
print the data.  
IMPORTANT  
„ Out of Memory  
DO NOT remove the USB flash memory  
from the USB direct interface until the  
printer has finished printing.  
This message will appear if you are  
working with images that are too large for  
the machine’s memory.  
„ Unusable Device  
This message will appear if you connect  
an incompatible or broken device to the  
USB direct interface. To clear the error,  
unplug the device from the USB direct  
interface.  
(See Error and maintenance messages  
on page 142 for the detailed solution.)  
14  
103  
   
Chapter 14  
104  
Section V  
Software  
V
Software and Network features  
106  
 
Software and Network features  
15  
15  
The User’s Guide on the CD-ROM includes  
the Software User’s Guide and Network  
User’s Guide for features available when  
connected to a computer (for example,  
printing and scanning). These guides have  
easy to use links that, when clicked, will take  
you directly to a particular section.  
b Click on the manual you want  
(SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) from the  
Top Menu.  
You can find information on these features:  
„ Printing  
„ Scanning  
„ ControlCenter3 (Windows®)  
„ ControlCenter2 (Macintosh)  
„ Remote Setup  
„ Faxing from your computer  
„ Network Faxing  
c Click the heading you would like to view  
from the list at the left of the window.  
„ Network Printing  
„ Network Scanning  
„ Wireless Network Users  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
Note  
See Accessing the Software User’s Guide  
and Network User’s Guide on page 3.  
Macintosh  
15  
How to read the HTML  
User’s Guide  
a Make sure your Macintosh is turned on.  
Insert the Brother CD-ROM into your  
CD-ROM drive.  
15  
b Double-click the Documentation icon.  
This is a quick reference for using the HTML  
User’s Guide.  
c Double-click your language folder, and  
then double-click top.html.  
d Click on the manual you want  
(SOFTWARE USER’S GUIDE or  
NETWORK USER’S GUIDE) in the top  
menu, and then click the heading you  
would like to read from the list at the left  
of the window.  
®
Windows  
15  
Note  
If you have not installed the software, see  
Viewing documentation (Windows®)  
on page 3.  
a From the Start menu, point to Brother,  
MFC-XXXX from the programs group,  
then click User’s Guides in HTML  
format.  
106  
       
Section VI  
Appendixes  
VI  
Safety and legal  
Options  
108  
123  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance 125  
Menu and features  
Specifications  
Glossary  
193  
215  
234  
 
Safety and legal  
A
A
Choosing a location  
A
Put your machine on a flat, level, stable surface that is free of vibration and shocks, such as a  
desk. Put the machine near a telephone socket and a standard grounded electrical socket.  
Choose a location where the temperature remains between 10 °C and 32.5 °C and the humidity  
is between 20% to 80% (without condensation).  
WARNING  
DO NOT expose the machine to direct sunlight, excessive heat, open flames, salty or corrosive  
gasses, moisture or dust.  
DO NOT place the machine near heaters, air conditioners, refrigerators, water or chemicals.  
CAUTION  
Avoid placing your machine in a high-traffic area.  
Avoid placing your machine on a carpet.  
DO NOT connect your machine to electrical sockets controlled by wall switches or automatic  
timers, or to the same circuit as large appliances that might disrupt the power supply.  
Disruption of power can delete information from the machine’s memory.  
Avoid interference sources, such as other cordless telephone systems or speakers.  
Make sure cables leading to the machine do not constitute a trip hazard.  
108  
   
Safety and legal  
To use the machine safely  
A
A
Please keep these instructions for later reference and read them before attempting any maintenance.  
WARNING  
There are high voltage electrodes inside the machine. Before you clean the inside of the  
machine, make sure you have unplugged the telephone line cord first and then the power cord  
from the electrical socket. Doing this will prevent an electrical shock.  
DO NOT handle the plug with wet hands. Doing this might cause an electrical shock.  
Always make sure the plug is fully inserted.  
This product must be installed near an electrical socket that is easily accessible. In case of an  
emergency, you must unplug the power cord from the electrical socket to shut off the power  
completely.  
Plastic bags are used in the packing of your machine and drum units. To avoid the danger of  
suffocation, keep these bags away from babies and children.  
109  
 
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray or any organic solvent/liquids contains  
alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the machine. Doing this may cause a fire  
or electrical shock. See Routine maintenance on page 155 for how to clean the machine.  
DO NOT use a vacuum cleaner to clean up scattered toner. Doing this might cause the toner  
dust to ignite inside the vacuum cleaner, potentially starting a fire. Please carefully clean the  
toner dust with a dry, lint-free soft cloth and dispose of it according to local regulations.  
This machine is heavy and weighs approximately 22.9 kg. To prevent injuries when moving or  
lifting this machine, make sure to use at least two people. Be careful not to pinch your fingers  
when you set the machine back down.  
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. Never touch telephone wires or  
terminals that are not insulated unless the telephone line has been unplugged at the wall socket.  
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall socket in  
a wet location.  
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to  
reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock and injury to people, including the following:  
1 DO NOT use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink  
or washing machine, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.  
2 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric  
shock from lightning.  
3 DO NOT use this product to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
4 DO NOT dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible  
special disposal instructions.  
110  
Safety and legal  
5 We DO NOT advise using an extension lead.  
6 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm. Never install a telephone wall socket  
in a wet location.  
A
7 If any cables become damaged, disconnect your machine, and contact your Brother dealer.  
8 DO NOT place any objects on the machine, or obstruct the air vents.  
9 This product should be connected to an adjacent grounded AC power source within the  
range indicated on the rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If  
you are not sure, contact a qualified electrician.  
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
CAUTION  
After you have just used the machine, some internal parts of the machine will be extremely hot.  
To prevent injury, when you open the top or back cover (back output tray) of the machine, DO  
NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustration.  
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your hands on the edge of the machine under the  
document cover, the scanner, or the top cover as shown in the illustrations.  
111  
To prevent injuries, be careful not to put your fingers in the areas shown in the illustrations.  
IMPORTANT  
The fuser unit is marked with a caution label. Please DO NOT remove or damage the label.  
112  
Safety and legal  
Disconnect device  
A
This product must be installed near an electrical socket that is easily accessible. In case of  
emergencies, you must disconnect the power cord from the electrical socket to shut off power  
completely.  
A
LAN connection  
A
CAUTION  
DO NOT connect this product to a LAN connection that is subject to over-voltages.  
Radio interference  
A
This product complies with EN55022 (CISPR Publication 22)/Class B.  
®
International ENERGY STAR Qualification Statement  
A
The purpose of the International ENERGY STAR® Program is to promote the development and  
popularization of energy-efficient office equipment.  
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Brother Industries, Ltd. has determined that this product meets  
the ENERGY STAR® specifications for energy efficiency.  
113  
       
Important Information for Australia  
A
IMPORTANT-For Your Safety  
A
To ensure safe operation the three-pin plug supplied must be inserted only into a standard  
threepin power point which is effectively grounded through the normal household wiring.  
Extension cords used with the equipment must be three-conductor and be correctly wired to  
provide connection to ground. Incorrectly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities.  
The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power is grounded and  
that the installation is completely safe. For your safety, if in any doubt about the effective  
grounding of the power, consult a qualified electrician.  
Important Safety Instructions  
A
1 Read all of these instructions.  
2 Save them for later reference.  
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
4 Unplug this product from the wall socket before cleaning the outside of the machine and the  
scanner glass. DO NOT use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
5 DO NOT use this product near water.  
6 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing  
serious damage to the product.  
7 Slots and openings in the casing at the back or bottom are provided for ventilation; to ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not  
be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,  
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator  
or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless adequate  
ventilation is provided.  
8 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the  
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact  
a qualified electrician.  
9 This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounded plug, a plug having a third (grounded) pin.  
This plug will only fit into a grounded power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to  
insert the plug into the outlet, call your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. DO NOT  
defeat the purpose of the grounded plug.  
10 Use the product in a well-ventilated area.  
11 DO NOT place anything on top of the power cord including this machine. DO NOT allow the  
power cord to be stepped on.  
12 DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place  
anything in the path of received faxes.  
13 DO NOT touch a document during printing.  
114  
     
Safety and legal  
14 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never  
spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
A
15 DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself, because opening or removing covers may  
expose you to dangerous voltage points and/or other risks. Refer all servicing to service  
personnel  
16 Wait until pages have exited the machine before picking them up.  
17 Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to Authorised Service Personnel  
under the following conditions:  
„ When the power cord is damaged or frayed.  
„ If liquid has been spilled into the product.  
„ If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
„ If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.  
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Incorrect  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by  
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
„ If the product has been dropped or the casing has been damaged.  
„ If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
Important Information for New Zealand  
A
IMPORTANT-For Your Safety  
A
To ensure safe operation the three-pin plug supplied must be inserted only into a standard  
threepin power point which is effectively grounded through the normal household wiring.  
Extension cords used with the equipment must be three-conductor and be correctly wired to  
provide connection to ground. Incorrectly wired extension cords are a major cause of fatalities.  
The fact that the equipment operates satisfactorily does not imply that the power is grounded and  
that the installation is completely safe. For your safety, if in any doubt about the effective  
grounding of the power, consult a qualified electrician.  
Important Safety Instructions  
A
1 Read all of these instructions.  
2 Save them for later reference.  
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
4 Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the outside of the machine and the  
scanner glass. DO NOT use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
115  
     
5 The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has  
accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It  
indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty.  
Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another  
item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any  
product is compatible with all of Telecom’s network services.  
6 This equipment does not fully meet Telecom’s impedance requirements. Performance  
limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network. Telecom will  
accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.  
7 If a charge for local calls is acceptable, the “Dial Button” should not be used for local calls. Only  
the 7-digits of the local number should be dialled from your telephone. DO NOT dial the area  
code digit or the “0 ” prefix.  
8 This equipment shall not be set to make automatic calls to the Telecom ‘111 ’ Emergency  
Service.  
9 This equipment should not be used under any circumstances which may constitute a nuisance  
to other Telecom customers.  
10 Not all telephones will respond to incoming ringing when connected to the extension socket.  
11 The answer delay setting of this equipment shall not be set to less than the default setting as  
this will destroy Caller ID information.  
12 All persons using this device for recording telephone conversations shall comply with New  
Zealand law. This requires that at least one party to the conversation is to be aware that it is  
being recorded. In addition, the Principles enumerated in the Privacy Act 1993 shall be  
complied with in respect to the nature of the personal information collected, the purpose for its  
collection, how it is to be used and what it disclosed to any other party.  
13 DO NOT place this product on an unstable surface, stand, or table. The product may fall,  
causing serious damage to the product.  
14 Slots and openings in the casing and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation; to ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not  
be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,  
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator  
or heater. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation  
is provided.  
15 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the  
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact  
a qualified electrician.  
16 This product is equipped with a 3-wire earthed plug. This plug will fit into only an earthed  
socket. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your  
electrician to replace your obsolete socket. DO NOT defeat the purpose of an earthed plug.  
17 Use the product in a well-ventilated area.  
18 DO NOT place anything on top of the power cord including this machine. DO NOT allow the  
power cord to be stepped on.  
19 DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place  
anything in the path of received faxes.  
116  
Safety and legal  
20 DO NOT touch a document during printing.  
21 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in a risk of fire or electric shock. Never  
spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
A
22 DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself, because opening or removing covers may  
expose you to dangerous voltage points and/or other risks. Refer all servicing to service  
personnel.  
23 Unplug this product from the mains power and telephone line sockets, and refer servicing to  
qualified Service Personnel under the following conditions:  
„ If the power cord is damaged or frayed.  
„ If liquid has been spilled into the product.  
„ If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
„ If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.  
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Incorrect  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by  
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
„ If the product has been dropped or the casing has been damaged.  
„ If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
24 This unit will only work in conjunction with a tone signalling (DTMF) telephone, but some  
telephones are not compatible. Since noise or speech from the telephone can upset dialling  
from this unit, errors may result if the devices are used together in other than quiet conditions.  
25 Where it is necessary to dial prefix digits, such as a Caller Display override code (“0196 ” or  
“0197 ”), this unit will have to be used in conjunction with an associated tone signalling (DTMF)  
telephone.  
26 Note that some telephones are not compatible with this unit and dialling errors may result if the  
two devices are used together in other than quiet conditions. The Telecom Faults Service is  
not to be called should such problems arise. In such cases, it is recommended that the prefix  
and wanted number are dialled manually.  
27 This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device  
connected to the same line.  
28 This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher  
speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise  
in such circumstances. This condition typically applies to 56 kbit/s modems and facsimile  
machines operating at >14.4 kbit/s.  
29 When using the Caller Line Identification incorporated in this device, verify the integrity of the  
recorded digits prior to dialling.  
117  
30 Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom’s Telepermit requirements are  
dependent on the equipment (PC) associated with this device. The associated equipment shall  
be set to operate within the following limits for compliance with Telecom’s Specifications:  
„ There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute  
period for any single manual call initiation, and  
„ The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end  
of one attempt and the beginning of the next call attempt.  
„ Automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not less than 5 seconds  
between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.  
„ Equipment shall be set to ensure that calls are answered within 3 and 30 seconds of the  
receipt of ringing.  
31 In the event of any problem with this device, it is to be disconnected, and a CPE item connected  
to one of its terminal ports may be connected directly in its place. The user should then arrange  
for the product to be repaired. Should the matter be reported to Telecom as a wiring fault and  
the fault is proven to be due to this product, a call out charge will be incurred by the customer.  
32 The caller ID telephone numbers that are displayed and stored in this equipment include the  
caller’s area code but not the toll access “0” prefix. When calling back it is necessary to add a  
“0“ to the telephone number, or if the telephone number is a local number, omit the area code  
digit. If the toll services of a service provider other than Telecom are being used then a toll  
charge may be incurred if the “0” prefix toll access code and area code are used.  
IMPORTANT NOTICE  
A
Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate  
telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use in emergencies.  
118  
 
Safety and legal  
Important Information for Some Countries  
A
A
Important Safety Instructions  
A
1 Read all of these instructions.  
2 Save them for later reference.  
3 Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.  
4 Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the outside of the machine and the  
scanner glass. DO NOT use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.  
5 DO NOT place this product near water.  
6 DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may drop, causing  
serious damage to the product.  
7 Slots and openings in the casing at the back or bottom are provided for ventilation; to ensure  
reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, these openings must not  
be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,  
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or on a radiator  
or heater. This product should never be placed in a built-in installation unless adequate  
ventilation is provided.  
8 This product should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the  
rating label. DO NOT connect it to a DC power source or inverter. If you are not sure, contact  
a qualified electrician.  
9 This product is equipped with a 2-wire grounding type plug or a 3-wire grounding type plug  
(Only for Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong and India), a plug having two or three pins. This  
plug will only fit into only a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are  
unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet.  
DO NOT defeat the purpose of the grounding-type plug.  
10 Use the product in a well-ventilated area.  
11 DO NOT place anything on top of the power cord including this machine. DO NOT allow the  
power cord to be stepped on.  
12 If an extension cord is used with this product, make sure that the total ampere ratings on the  
products plugged into the extension cord DO NOT exceed the extension cord ampere rating.  
13 DO NOT place anything in front of the machine that will block received faxes. DO NOT place  
nything in the path of received faxes.  
14 DO NOT touch a document during printing.  
15 Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots, since they may touch  
dangerous voltage points or short out parts resulting in the risk of fire or electric shock. Never  
spill liquid of any kind on the product.  
16 DO NOT attempt to service this product yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose  
you to dangerous voltage points and/or other risks, and may void your warranty. Please refer  
all servicing to our Authorized Service Personnel. A list of Authorized Service Centres has  
been included for your convenience, or you may contact the Brother Dealer for Service.  
119  
   
17 Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to Authorized Service Personnel  
under the following conditions:  
„ If the power cord is damaged or frayed.  
„ If the product has been spilled by liquid.  
„ If the product has been exposed to rain or water.  
„ If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed.  
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Incorrect  
adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by  
a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.  
„ If the product has been dropped or the casing has been damaged.  
„ If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance, indicating a need for service.  
18 To protect your product against power surges, we recommend the use of a power protection  
device (Surge Protector).  
WARNING  
For protection against the risk of electrical shock, always disconnect all cables from the wall  
outlet before servicing, modifying or installing the equipment.  
This equipment may not be used on coin service lines provided by the telephone company or  
connected to party lines.  
Brother cannot accept any financial or other responsibilities that may be the result of your use  
of this information, including direct, special or consequential damages. There are no warranties  
extended or granted by this document.  
120  
Safety and legal  
Libtiff Copyright and License  
A
A
Use and Copyright  
Copyright© 1988-1997 Sam Leffler  
Copyright© 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any  
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this  
permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the  
names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating  
to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,  
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY  
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,  
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY  
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,  
WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY  
OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE  
OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
Legal limitations for copying  
A
It is an offence to make reproductions of certain items or documents with the intent to commit  
fraud. This memorandum is intended to be a guide rather than a complete list. We suggest you  
check with relevant legal authorities if in doubt about a particular item or document.  
The following are examples of documents which should not be copied:  
„ Money  
„ Bonds or other certificates of debt  
„ Certificates of Deposit  
„ Armed Forces Service or Draft papers  
„ Passports  
„ Postage Stamps (cancelled or uncancelled)  
„ Immigration Papers  
„ Welfare documents  
„ Cheques or Drafts drawn by Governmental Agencies  
„ Identification Documents, badges or insignias  
„ Licences and Certificates of Title to motor vehicles  
Copyrighted works cannot be copied. Sections of a copyrighted work can be copied for ‘fair  
dealing’. Multiple copies would indicate improper use.  
Works of art should be considered the equivalent of copyrighted works.  
121  
   
Trademarks  
A
The Brother logo is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Brother is a registered trademark of Brother Industries, Ltd.  
Multi-Function Link is a registered trademark of Brother International Corporation.  
Adobe, Flash, Illustrator, PageMaker, Photoshop, PostScript and PostScript 3 are either  
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or  
other countries.  
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the  
United States and other countries.  
Apple, Macintosh, Safari and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United  
States and other countries.  
Intel, and Pentium are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.  
AMD is a trademark of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.  
PowerPC is a registered trademark of IBM in the United States and/or other countries.  
PictBridge is a trademark.  
Epson is a registered trademark and FX-80 and FX-850 are trademarks of Seiko Epson  
Corporation.  
IBM and Proprinter are either registered trademarks or trademarks of International Business  
Machines Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
BROADCOM, SecureEasySetup and the SecureEasySetup logo are trademarks or registered  
trademarks of Broadcom Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Wi-Fi, WPA, WPA2, Wi-Fi Protected Access and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are either trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance in the United States and/or other countries.  
AOSS is a trademark of Buffalo Inc.  
Nuance, the Nuance logo, PaperPort and ScanSoft are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
122  
 
Options  
B
B
Installing extra memory  
B
Memory board  
B
B
This machine has 64 MB of standard memory  
and one slot for optional memory expansion.  
You can expand the memory up to 576 MB by  
installing dual in-line memory modules  
(SO-DIMMs). When you add the optional  
memory, it increases the performance for  
both copier and printer operations.  
a Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord.  
b Disconnect the interface cable from the  
machine, and then unplug the power  
cord from the electrical socket.  
Note  
In general, the machine uses  
industry-standard SO-DIMM with the  
following specifications:  
Be sure to turn off the machine’s power  
switch before you install or remove the  
SO-DIMM.  
Type: 144 pin and 64 bit output  
CAS latency: 2  
c Remove the plastic (1) and then  
metal (2) SO-DIMM covers.  
Clock frequency: 100 MHz or more  
Capacity: 64, 128, 256 or 512 MB  
Height: 31.75 mm  
2
Dram Type: SDRAM 2 Bank  
1
You can find more information about memory  
modules on this website:  
http://www.buffalo-technology.com/  
Note  
d Unpack the SO-DIMM and hold it by its  
• There might be some SO-DIMMs that will  
not work with the machine.  
edges.  
• For more information, contact your  
Brother dealer.  
IMPORTANT  
To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
memory chips or the board surface.  
123  
     
e Hold the SO-DIMM by the edges and  
align the notches in the SO-DIMM with  
the protrusions in the slot. Insert the  
SO-DIMM diagonally (1), then tilt it  
toward the interface board until it clicks  
into place (2).  
1
2
f Put the metal (2) and then the plastic (1)  
SO-DIMM covers back on.  
2
1
g Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and then  
connect the interface cable.  
h Plug in the telephone line cord. Turn on  
the machine’s power switch.  
Note  
To make sure that you have installed the  
SO-DIMM correctly, you can print the user  
settings page that shows the current  
memory size. (See How to print a report  
on page 84.)  
124  
Troubleshooting and routine  
maintenance  
C
C
Troubleshooting  
C
If you think there is a problem with your machine, check the chart below and follow the  
troubleshooting tips.  
Most problems can be easily resolved by yourself. If you need additional help, the Brother  
Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips.  
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.  
C
If you are having difficulty with your machine  
C
If you think there is a problem with the way your faxes look, make a copy first. If the copy looks  
good, the problem may not be your machine. Check the chart below and follow the troubleshooting  
tips.  
Printing or printing received faxes  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
„ Condensed print  
Usually this is caused by a poor telephone connection. If your copy looks good,  
you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone  
line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.  
„ Horizontal streaks  
„ Top and bottom sentences are  
cut off  
„ Missing lines  
Poor print quality  
See Improving the print quality on page 134.  
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty. Clean the corona wires on the four  
drum units. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 158.)  
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the  
problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.  
If the problem continues, call your dealer for service.  
Received faxes appear as split or  
blank pages.  
If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra  
blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.  
(See Paper Size on page 24.)  
Turn on Auto Reduction. (See Printing a reduced incoming fax on page 50.)  
125  
       
Telephone line or connections  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Dialling does not work.  
Check for a dial tone.  
(Not available in New Zealand) Change Tone/Pulsesetting. (See the Quick  
Setup Guide.)  
Check all line cord connections.  
Check that the machine is plugged in and switched on.  
If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the  
handset of the external telephone and dialling the number. Wait to hear the fax  
receiving tones before pressing Mono Start or Colour Start.  
The machine does not answer  
when called.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup. (See  
Receive Mode settings on page 48.) Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your  
machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check the telephone line cord  
connection. If you do not hear ringing when you call your machine, ask your  
telephone company to check the line.  
Receiving Faxes  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into  
the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to  
DSL or VoIP services, please contact your service provider for connection  
instructions.  
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the  
external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as  
the Brother machine. (See Receive Mode settings on page 48.)  
If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically  
answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Onlymode.  
If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you  
should select the External TADmode. In External TADmode, your Brother  
machine will automatically receive incoming faxes and voice callers will be able to  
leave a message on your answering machine.  
If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to  
automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Telmode. In  
Fax/Telmode, your Brother machine will automatically receive faxes and  
produce a fast double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.  
If you do not want your Brother machine to automatically answer any incoming  
faxes, you should select the Manualmode. In Manualmode, you must answer  
every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.  
126  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Receiving Faxes (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot receive a fax.  
(continued)  
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your  
Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the ring delay setting:  
„ If the answer mode is set to Fax Onlyor Fax/Tel, reduce the ring delay to  
1 ring. (See Ring Delay on page 48.)  
„ If the answer mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings  
programmed on your answering machine to 2.  
C
„ If the answer mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the ring delay setting.  
Have someone send you a test fax:  
„ If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating properly.  
Remember to reset your ring delay or answering machine setting back to your  
original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the ring delay, then  
a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the  
machine has a chance to answer.  
„ If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber  
service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem  
with your fax line.  
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TADmode) on the  
same line as the Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up  
correctly. (See Connecting an external TAD on page 58.)  
1
2
3
Connect the external TAD as shown in the illustration on page 59.  
Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings.  
Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.  
„ Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing  
message.  
„ Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.  
„ End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people  
sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or  
press l51 and Start to send a fax.”  
4
5
Set your answering machine to answer calls.  
Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD. (See Receive  
Mode settings on page 48.)  
Make sure your Brother machine's Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is  
a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you have answered the call on an  
external or extension telephone. (See Fax Detect on page 49.)  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
Telephone line interference on page 141.)  
(For MFC-9320CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure  
Function Lock Settings.  
127  
Sending faxes  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Poor sending quality.  
Try changing your resolution to Fineor S.Fine. Make a copy to check your  
machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is not good, clean the scanner.  
(See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 156.)  
Transmission Verification Report  
says RESULT:ERROR.  
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again.  
If you are sending a PC Fax message and get RESULT:ERRORon the  
Transmission Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up  
extra memory, you can turn off fax storage (see Turning off Remote Fax Options  
on page 75), print fax messages in memory (see Printing a fax from the memory  
on page 51) or cancel a delayed fax or polling job (see Checking and cancelling  
waiting jobs on page 45). If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to  
check your telephone line.  
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone  
line, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic(for VoIP). (See  
Telephone line interference on page 141.)  
Sent faxes are blank.  
Make sure you are loading the document properly. (See Loading documents  
on page 22)  
Vertical black lines when sending.  
Cannot send a fax.  
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid  
on the glass strip. (See Cleaning the scanner glass on page 156.)  
(For MFC-9320CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure  
Function Lock Settings.  
Handling incoming calls  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine ‘Hears’ a voice as a  
CNG Tone.  
If Fax Detect is set to On, your machine is more sensitive to sounds. It may  
mistakenly interpret certain voices or music on the line as a fax machine calling  
and respond with fax receiving tones. Deactivate the machine by pressing  
Stop/Exit. Try avoiding this problem by turning Fax Detect to Off. (See Fax Detect  
on page 49.)  
Sending a Fax Call to the machine. If you answered on an external or extension telephone, press your Remote  
Activation code (default setting is l51 (l91 for New Zealand)). When your  
machine answers, hang up.  
Custom features on a single line.  
If you have Call Waiting, Call Waiting/Caller ID, Caller ID, Voice Mail, an  
answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single  
telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving  
faxes.  
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and  
its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax,  
the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM feature  
should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone  
system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information  
on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is  
crucial to your business, a separate line with no custom features is recommended.  
128  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Menu access difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine beeps when you try to  
access the Setup Receive and  
Setup Send menus.  
If Fax  
is not illuminated, press it to turn on Fax mode. The Setup Receive  
setting (Menu, 2, 1) and Setup Send setting (Menu, 2, 2) are available only when  
the machine is in Fax mode.  
Copy difficulties  
C
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot make a copy.  
„ Make sure that Copy  
is illuminated. (See Entering copy mode  
on page 86.)  
„ (For MFC-9320CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure  
Function Lock Settings.  
Vertical black line appears in  
copies.  
Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the  
glass strip, or one or more corona wires are dirty. (See Cleaning the scanner glass  
on page 156 and Cleaning the corona wires on page 158.)  
Copies are blank.  
Make sure you are loading the document correctly. (See Using the automatic  
document feeder (ADF) on page 22 or Using the scanner glass (Flatbed)  
on page 23.)  
Printing difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
No printout.  
„ Check that the machine is plugged in and the power switch is turned on.  
„ Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit are installed correctly. (See  
Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
„ Check the interface cable connection on both the machine and your computer.  
(See the Quick Setup Guide.)  
„ Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and chosen.  
„ Check to see if the LCD is showing an error message. (See Error and  
maintenance messages on page 142.)  
„ Check the machine is online: (Windows Vista®) Click the Start button,  
Control Panel, Hardware and Sound, and then Printers. Right-click  
Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is  
unchecked. (Windows® XP and Windows Server® 2003) Click the Start  
button and choose Printers and Faxes. Right-click Brother MFC-XXXX  
Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is unchecked. (Windows® 2000)  
Click the Start button and choose Settings and then Printers. Right-click  
Brother MFC-XXXX Printer. Make sure that Use Printer Offline is  
unchecked.  
„ (For MFC-9320CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure  
Function Lock settings.  
The machine prints unexpectedly  
or it prints garbage.  
„ Pull out the paper tray and wait until the machine stops printing. Then turn off  
the machine and disconnect from the power for several minutes. (The  
machine can be turned off for up to 60 hours without losing faxes stored in the  
memory.)  
„ Check the settings in your application to make sure it is set up to work with  
your machine.  
129  
   
Printing difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine prints the first couple  
of pages correctly, then some  
pages have text missing.  
„ Check the settings in your application to make sure that it is set up to work with  
your machine.  
„ Your computer is not recognising the machine’s input buffer’s full signal. Make  
sure that you connected the interface cable correctly. (See the Quick Setup  
Guide.)  
The headers or footers appear  
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and  
when the document displays on the bottom margins in your document to allow for this. (See Unprintable area  
screen but they do not show up  
when it is printed.  
on page 16.)  
The machine is not printing or has Press Job Cancel.  
stopped printing.  
As the machine cancels the job and clears it from the memory it may produce an  
incomplete printout.  
Scanning difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
TWAIN errors appear while  
scanning.  
Make sure that the Brother TWAIN driver is chosen as the primary source. In  
PaperPort™ 11SE, click File, Scan or Get Photo and choose the Brother TWAIN  
driver.  
OCR does not work.  
Network scanning does not work.  
Cannot scan.  
Try increasing the scanning resolution.  
See Network difficulties on page 131.  
(For MFC-9320CW only) Contact your administrator to check your Secure  
Function Lock Settings.  
Software difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot install software or print.  
Run the Repair MFL-Pro Suite program on the CD-ROM. This program will repair  
and reinstall the software.  
Cannot perform ‘2 in 1’ or ‘4 in 1’  
printing.  
Check that the paper size setting in the application and in the printer driver are the  
same.  
The machine does not print from  
Adobe® Illustrator®.  
Try to reduce the print resolution. (See Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide  
on the CD-ROM.)  
Paper handling difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine does not load paper.  
„ If there is no paper, load a new stack of paper into the paper tray.  
The LCD shows No Paperor a  
Paper Jam message.  
„ If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight. If the paper is curled,  
you should straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the  
stack over and put it back into the paper tray.  
„ Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.  
„ Make sure that manual feed mode is not chosen in the printer driver.  
„ Clean the paper pick-up roller. See Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers  
on page 164.  
„ If the LCD shows the Paper Jam message and you still have a problem, see  
Paper jams on page 150.  
130  
     
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Paper handling difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine does not feed paper  
from the manual feed slot.  
„ Make sure that Manual is chosen in the printer driver.  
„ Make sure the paper or print media is loaded correctly in the manual feed slot.  
See Loading paper in the manual feed slot on page 12.  
How do I print on envelopes?  
What paper can I use?  
You can load envelopes from the manual feed slot. Your application must be set  
up to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup  
or Document Setup menu of your application. (See your application’s manual for  
more information.)  
C
You can use thin paper, plain paper, thick paper, bond paper, recycled paper,  
envelopes and labels that are made for laser machines. (For details, see  
Acceptable paper and other print media on page 17.)  
There is a paper jam.  
Clear the jammed paper. (See Paper jams on page 150.)  
Print quality difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Printed pages are curled.  
„ Low quality thin or thick paper or not printing on the recommended side of the  
paper could cause this problem. Try turning over the stack of paper in the  
paper tray.  
„ Make sure that you choose the Paper Type that suits the print media type you  
are using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 17.)  
Printed pages are smeared.  
Printouts are too light.  
The Paper Type setting may be incorrect for the type of print media you are using,  
or the print media may be too thick or have a rough surface. (See Acceptable  
paper and other print media on page 17 and Basic tab in the Software User’s  
Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ If this problem occurs when making copies or printing received faxes, set  
Toner Save mode to Offin the machine menu settings. (See Toner Save  
on page 26.)  
„ Set Toner Save mode to Offin the Advanced tab in the printer driver. (See  
Advanced tab in the Software User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ In the Basic tab of the printer driver, click the Settings button and check the  
Enhance Black Printing check box.  
Network difficulties  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
Cannot print over a wired Network. If you are having Network problems see the Network User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM for more information.  
Make sure your machine is powered on and is on-line and in the Ready mode.  
Print the Network Configuration list to see your current Network settings. (See  
How to print a report on page 84.) Reconnect the LAN cable to the hub to verify  
that the cable and network connections are good. If possible, try connecting the  
machine to a different port on your hub using a different cable. If the connections  
are good, the lower LED of the back panel of the machine will be green.  
131  
     
Network difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
(Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary  
The network scanning feature  
does not work.  
network connection. Follow the instructions below to configure Windows®  
Firewall. If you are using other personal firewall software, see the User’s Guide  
for your software or contact the software manufacturer.  
The network PC Fax Receive  
feature does not work.  
(Windows® XP SP2)  
The network printing feature does  
not work.  
a
Click the Start button, Control Panel, Network and Internet  
Connections and then Windows Firewall. Make sure that Windows  
Firewall on the General tab is set to On.  
b
c
d
Click the Advanced tab and Settings...  
Click the Add button.  
To add port 54925 for network scanning, enter the information below:  
1. In Description of service: Enter any description, for example  
“Brother Scanner”.  
2. In Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer  
hosting this service on your network: Enter “Localhost”.  
3. In External Port number for this service: Enter “54925”.  
4. In Internal Port number for this service: Enter “54925”.  
5. Make sure UDP is chosen.  
6. Click OK.  
e
f
Click the Add button.  
To add port 54926 for network PC Fax, enter the information below:  
1. In Description of service: Enter any description, for example  
“Brother PC Fax”.  
2. In Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer  
hosting this service on your network: Enter “Localhost”.  
3. In External Port number for this service: Enter “54926”.  
4. In Internal Port number for this service: Enter “54926”.  
5. Make sure UDP is chosen.  
6. Click OK.  
g
h
If you still have trouble with your network connection, click the Add button.  
To add port 137 for network scanning, network printing and network PC  
Fax receiving, enter the information below:  
1. In Description of service: Enter any description, for example  
“Brother PC Fax receiving”.  
2. In Name or IP address (for example 192.168.0.12) of the computer  
hosting this service on your network: Enter “Localhost”.  
3. In External Port number for this service: Enter “137”.  
4. In Internal Port number for this service: Enter “137”.  
5. Make sure UDP is chosen.  
6. Click OK.  
i
Make sure that the new setting is added and is checked, and then  
click OK.  
132  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Network difficulties (continued)  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
(Windows Vista®)  
The network scanning feature  
does not work.  
a
b
Click the Start button, Control Panel, Network and Internet, Windows  
Firewall and click Change settings.  
The network PC Fax Receive  
feature does not work.  
The network printing feature does  
not work.  
When the User Account Control screen appears, do the following.  
„ Users who have administrator rights: Click Continue.  
C
(continued)  
„ For users who do not have administrator rights: Enter the  
administrator password and click OK.  
c
d
e
f
Make sure that Windows Firewall on the General tab is set to On.  
Click the Exceptions tab.  
Click the Add port... button.  
To add port 54925 for network scanning, enter the information below:  
1. In Name: Enter any description. (for example “Brother Scanner”)  
2. In Port number: Enter “54925”.  
3. Make sure UDP is chosen. Then click OK.  
g
h
Click the Add port... button.  
To add port 54926 for Network PC Fax, enter the information below:  
1. In Name: Enter any description. (for example “Brother PC Fax”)  
2. In Port number: Enter “54926”.  
3. Make sure UDP is chosen. Then click OK.  
i
j
Make sure that the new setting is added and is checked, and then click  
OK.  
If you still have trouble with your network connection such as network  
scanning or printing, check File and Printer Sharing box in the  
Exceptions tab and then click OK.  
(Windows®) The firewall setting on your PC may be rejecting the necessary  
network connection. (For details, see the instructions above.)  
Your computer cannot find your  
machine.  
(Macintosh) Re-select your machine in the Device Selector application located  
in Macintosh HD/Library/Printers/Brother/Utilities/DeviceSelector or from  
the Model pop-up menu of ControlCenter2.  
Other  
Difficulties  
Suggestions  
The machine will not turn on.  
Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge)  
may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Turn the machine  
off and unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord  
and turn the machine on.  
If the problem is not solved, turn off the machine. Plug the power cord into a  
different known working outlet and turn on the machine.  
133  
Improving the print quality  
C
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first (Menu, 4, 2, 3). If the printout looks good,  
the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections or try printing a  
different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem,  
check the following steps first. And then, if you still have a print quality problem, check the chart  
below and follow the recommendation.  
a Check that you use the paper that meets our specifications. (See Acceptable paper and other  
print media on page 17.)  
Note  
To get the best print quality, we suggest using the recommended paper. (See Acceptable  
paper and other print media on page 17.)  
b Check that the drum units and toner cartridges are installed correctly.  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
White lines, bands or ribbing  
across the page  
„ Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnqrsuwx.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
Colours are light or unclear on  
the whole page  
„ Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine  
or the printer driver.  
„ Make sure that you choose the proper media type in the printer driver  
or in the machine's Paper Type menu setting. (See Acceptable paper  
and other print media on page 17 and Basic tab in the Software  
User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Shake all four toner cartridges gently.  
„ Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.  
(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 157.)  
134  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
White streaks or bands down  
the page  
„ Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.  
(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 157.)  
„ Clean all four drum units. (See Cleaning the drum unit on page 159.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnoxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Identify the missing colour and put in a new toner cartridge. (See  
Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
C
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopt
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
Coloured streaks or bands  
down the page  
„ Clean all four corona wires (one for each colour) inside the drum unit  
by sliding the green tab. (See Cleaning the corona wires  
on page 158.)  
„ Make sure the corona wire cleaners are at their home positions (a).  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnostuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Clean the scanner glass and scanner glass strip. (See Cleaning the  
scanner glass on page 156.)  
„ Replace the toner cartridge that matches the colour of the streak or  
band. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
„ Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
Vertical streaks in a light  
background  
„ Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry lint free soft cloth.  
(See Cleaning the LED heads on page 157.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnoxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
135  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Coloured lines across the page „ If coloured lines appear at 30 mm intervals, replace the toner  
cartridge that matches the colour of the line. (See Replacing a Toner  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnowxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnowxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
cartridge on page 168.)  
„ If coloured lines appear at 94 mm intervals, put in a new drum unit  
that matches the colour of the line. (See Replacing the drum units  
on page 174.)  
White spots or hollow print  
„ If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit  
may be stained. Clean all four drum units. (See Small spots on the  
printed pages in Cleaning the drum unit on page 159.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the  
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are  
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 17 and  
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity  
can cause white spots or hollow print. (See Choosing a location  
on page 108.)  
Completely blank or some  
colours are missing  
„ Put in a new toner cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge  
on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnorsuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnoqstvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
Coloured spots at 94 mm  
„ If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum unit  
may have glue from a label stuck on the drum surface. Clean the  
drum unit. (See Large spots on the printed pages in Cleaning the  
drum unit on page 159.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
94 mm  
94 mm  
„ Put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
Coloured spots at 30 mm  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner  
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmntz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
30 mm  
30 mm  
136  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Toner scatter or toner stain  
„ Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity  
and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See To  
use the machine safely on page 109.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnrtz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner  
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
C
„ If the problem continues, put in a new drum unit. (See Replacing the  
drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
The colour of your printouts is  
not what you expected  
„ Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine  
or the printer driver.  
„ Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 164.)  
„ Adjust the colour by using the custom setting in the driver and by  
using the control panel of the machine. Colours the machine can print  
and colours you see on a monitor are different. The machine may not  
be able to reproduce the colours on your monitor.  
„ If colours appear in the printed grey areas, make sure there is a check  
in the Improve Grey Colour check box of the printer driver. (See  
Basic tab for Windows® printer driver, Advanced tab for Macintosh  
printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh BR-Script printer  
driver in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ If shaded areas look dull, remove the check from the Improve Grey  
Colour check box.  
„ If a printed black graphic is too light, choose Enhance Black Printing  
mode in the printer driver. (See Settings Dialog for Windows® printer  
driver, Advanced options for Windows® BR-Script printer driver, Print  
Settings for Macintosh printer driver or Printer Features for Macintosh  
BR-Script printer driver in the Software User's Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner  
cartridge. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.  
(See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print problem.  
To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us at  
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips  
.
137  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
All one colour  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.  
(See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
Colour misregistration  
„ Make sure that the machine is on a solid level surface.  
„ Perform the auto colour registration using the control panel (see Auto  
Registration on page 165) or perform the manual colour registration  
using the control panel (see Manual Registration on page 165).  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
S
TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuv.  
S
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
S
TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
S
S
S
TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR TUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
S
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
S
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.  
(See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
„ Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the belt unit on page 177.)  
„ Perform the calibration. (See Calibration on page 164.)  
Uneven density appears  
periodically across the page  
„ Adjust the contrast or brightness when you are in copy mode. (See  
Adjusting Contrast, Colour and Brightness on page 89.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Identify the colour that is uneven and put in a new toner cartridge for  
that colour. (See Replacing a Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
You may only need to replace one toner cartridge to solve the print  
problem. To identify which toner cartridge needs to be replaced,  
please visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and  
troubleshooting tips.  
„ Identify the colour that is uneven and put in a new drum unit. (See  
Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
You may only need to replace one drum unit to solve the print  
problem. To identify which drum needs to be replaced, please visit us  
at http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
Thin lines do not print  
„ Make sure Toner Save mode is off in the control panel of the machine  
or the printer driver.  
„ Change the print resolution.  
„ If you use Windows® printer driver, choose Improve Pattern  
Printing or Improve Thin Line in Settings of Basic tab. (See  
Settings Dialog in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
138  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Wrinkle  
„ Change to the recommended type of paper.  
„ Make sure that the back cover is closed correctly.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnqsuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Make sure that two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up  
position.  
„ Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the  
machine’s Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are  
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 17 and  
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
C
Offset image  
„ Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the  
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are  
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 17 and  
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnoxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Make sure that two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up  
position.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as dry and low  
temperatures may cause this print quality problem. (See Choosing a  
location on page 108.)  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new drum unit.  
(See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
To identify the colour of the drum unit, visit us at  
http://solutions.brother.com/ to view our FAQs and troubleshooting  
tips.  
Poor fixing  
„ Make sure that the media type settings in the printer driver and in the  
machine's Paper Type menu matches the type of paper you are  
using. (See Acceptable paper and other print media on page 17 and  
Basic tab in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
„ Make sure that two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up  
position.  
„ Choose Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver. (See Other  
Print Options (For Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For  
Windows® BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh  
printer driver) or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer  
driver) in the Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
If this selection does not provide enough improvement, select  
Thicker paper in Media Type settings.  
139  
Examples of poor print  
quality  
Recommendation  
Curled or wavy  
„ Choose Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver when you do  
not use our recommended paper. (See Other Print Options (For  
Windows® printer driver), Advanced options (For Windows®  
BR-Script printer driver), Print Settings (For Macintosh printer driver)  
or Printer Features (For Macintosh BR-Script printer driver) in the  
Software User's Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the  
paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray.  
Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper  
tray.  
„ Store the paper where it will not be exposed to avoid high  
temperatures and high humidity.  
Uneven density or faded  
„ Fully open the top cover and then close it again.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnoxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnouvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.  
Envelope creases  
Make sure that the envelope levers are pulled down when you are  
printing envelopes.  
140  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Setting Dial Tone detection  
C
Telephone line interference  
C
When you send a fax automatically, by  
default your machine will wait for a fixed  
amount of time before it starts to dial the  
number. By changing the Dial Tone setting to  
Detectionyou can make your machine dial  
as soon as it detects a dial tone. This setting  
can save a small amount of time when  
sending a fax to many different numbers. If  
you change the setting and start having  
problems with dialling you should change  
back to the default No Detectionsetting.  
If you are having difficulty sending or  
receiving a fax due to possible interference  
on the telephone line, we recommend that  
you adjust the Equalization for compatibility  
to reduce the modem speed for fax  
operations.  
C
a Press Menu, 2, 0, 1.  
b Press a or b to choose  
Basic(for VoIP), Normalor High.  
„ Basic(for VoIP)cuts the  
a (for New Zealand) Press Menu, 0, 4.  
Press Menu, 0, 5  
modem speed to 9600 bps and turns  
the error correction mode (ECM) off.  
For a standard telephone line: If you  
regularly experience interference on  
your standard telephone line try this  
setting.  
b Press a or b to choose Detectionor  
No Detection.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
If you are using VoIP: VoIP service  
providers offer fax support using  
various standards. If you regularly  
experience fax transmission errors  
try this setting.  
„ Normalsets the modem speed at  
14400 bps.  
„ Highsets the modem speed at  
33600 bps.  
Press OK.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
When you change the Compatibility to  
Basic(for VoIP), the ECM feature is  
only available for colour fax sending.  
141  
     
Error and maintenance messages  
C
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and consumable items may need to be  
replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and  
shows the appropriate message. The most common error and maintenance messages are shown  
below.  
You can clear most errors and perform routine maintenance messages by yourself. If you need  
more help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips:  
Visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Access Error  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
The device is removed from the  
USB direct interface while the  
data is processing.  
Press Stop/Exit. Reinsert the device and try  
to print with Direct Print.  
Belt End Soon  
Calibrate  
The belt unit is near the end of its Buy a new belt unit before you get a  
life.  
Replace Beltmessage.  
Calibration failed.  
Press Mono Start or Colour Start and try it  
again.  
„ Turn off the machine. Wait a few  
seconds, then turn it on again.  
„ Identify the colour causing the problem  
and put in a new drum unit. (See  
Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
To identify the colour of the drum unit,  
visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/ to  
view our FAQs and troubleshooting tips.  
„ Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the  
belt unit on page 177.)  
„ Put in a waste toner box. (See Replacing  
the waste toner box on page 181.)  
„ If the problem continues, call your dealer  
or Brother Customer Service.  
Cartridge Error  
Thetoner cartridge is not installed Take out the drum unit and toner cartridge  
Put the Black (K) correctly.  
Toner Cartridge  
back in.1  
assembly for the toner colour that is  
indicated on the LCD. Remove the toner  
cartridge and then re-install it in the drum.  
Put the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly back into the machine again.  
1
The colour of the  
problem toner  
cartridge is shown in  
the message.  
142  
     
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Cooling Down  
Wait for a while  
The temperature of the drum unit Make sure that you can hear the fan in the  
or toner cartridge is too hot. The machine spinning and that the exhaust outlet  
machine will pause its current  
print job and go into cooling down  
mode. During the cooling down  
mode, you will hear the cooling  
fan running while the LCD shows  
Cooling Down, and  
is not blocked by something.  
If the fan is spinning, remove any obstacles  
that surround the exhaust outlet, and then  
leave the machine turned on but do not use  
it for several minutes.  
C
If the fan is not spinning do the following:  
Wait for a while.  
Disconnect the machine from the power for  
several minutes, then reconnect it. (The  
machine can be turned off for up to 4 days  
without losing faxes stored in the memory.  
See Transferring your faxes or Fax Journal  
report on page 148.)  
Comm.Error  
Poor telephone line quality  
caused a communication error.  
Try sending the fax again or try connecting  
the machine to another telephone line. If the  
problem continues, call the telephone  
company and ask them to check your  
telephone line.  
Connection Fail  
Cover is Open  
You tried to poll a fax machine  
that is not in Polled Waiting mode.  
Check the other fax machine’s polling setup.  
The ADF cover is not closed  
completely.  
Close the ADF cover of the machine, then  
press Stop/Exit.  
The top cover is not closed  
completely.  
Close the top cover of the machine.  
Cover is Open  
DIMM Error  
The fuser cover is not closed  
completely or paper was jammed  
in the back of the machine when  
you turned on the power.  
„ Close the fuser cover of the machine.  
„ Make sure paper is not jammed inside  
the back of the machine, and then close  
the fuser cover and press Mono Start or  
Colour Start.  
The DIMM is not installed  
Turn off the machine. Re-install the DIMM  
correctly. Or the DIMM is broken. correctly. Wait a few seconds, and then turn  
it on again. If this error message appears  
again, replace the DIMM with a new one.  
(See Installing extra memory on page 123.)  
Disconnected  
Document Jam  
The other person or other  
person’s fax machine stopped the  
call.  
Try to send or receive again.  
The document was not inserted  
See Document jams on page 149 or Using  
or fed correctly, or the document the automatic document feeder (ADF)  
scanned from the ADF was too  
long.  
on page 22.  
Drum Error  
The corona wire on the drum unit Clean the corona wire on the drum unit. (See  
needs to be cleaned.  
Cleaning the corona wires on page 158.)  
It is time to replace the drum  
units.  
Replace the drum unit with a new one for the  
colour that is indicated on the LCD. (See  
Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
143  
 
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Drums End Soon  
The drum units are near the end Buy new drum units before you get a  
of their life.  
Replace Drumsmessage.  
Drum End Soon(X)1  
The drum unit for the colour  
indicated on the LCD is near the the LCD before you get a  
Buy new drum unit for the colour indicated on  
Replace Drum(X)1 message.  
end of its life.  
DR mode in Use  
The machine is set to Distinctive Set Distinctive Ring to off.  
Ring mode. You can not change  
For Austlaria, see Telstra® FaxStream®  
(except New Zealand)  
the Receive Mode from Manual to  
Duet® (Distinctive Ringing) on page 52.  
another mode.  
For Other countries, see Distinctive Ringing  
(For Singapore and Hong Kong) on page 56.  
Faxability On  
The machine is set to Faxability  
mode. You can not change the  
Recieve Mode from Manual to  
another mode.  
Set Faxability to off.  
(For New Zealand)  
See FaxAbility on page 54.  
Fuser Error  
The temperature of fuser unit  
does not rise at a specified  
Turn the power switch off, wait a few  
seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the  
temperature within specified time. machine for 15 minutes with the power on.  
The machine can be turned off for up to  
The fuser unit is too hot.  
60 hours without losing faxes stored in the  
memory. (See Transferring your faxes or Fax  
Journal report on page 148.)  
Init Unable XX  
The machine has a mechanical  
problem.  
„ Disconnect the machine from the power  
for several minutes, then reconnect it.  
(The machine can be turned off for up to  
60 hours without losing faxes stored in  
the memory. See Transferring your faxes  
or Fax Journal report on page 148.)  
(XX=Error Code)  
„ If the problem continues, call Brother  
Customer Service.  
Jam Inside  
Jam Rear  
The paper is jammed inside the  
machine.  
(See Paper jams on page 150.)  
The paper is jammed in the back (See Paper jams on page 150.)  
of the machine.  
Jam Tray  
The paper is jammed in the paper (See Paper jams on page 150.)  
tray of the machine.  
No Belt Unit  
The belt unit is not installed  
correctly.  
Re-install the belt unit. (See Replacing the  
belt unit on page 177.)  
144  
 
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
No Paper  
The machine is out of paper or  
paper is not correctly loaded in  
the paper tray.  
Do one of the following:  
„ Refill the paper in the paper tray and  
press Mono Start or Colour Start or put  
the paper in the manual feed slot.  
„ Remove the paper and load it again.  
Then press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
C
„ If the problem is not solved, the paper  
pick-up roller may be stained. Clean the  
paper pickup roller. (See Cleaning the  
paper pick-up rollers on page 164.)  
No Response/Busy  
No Toner  
The number you dialled does not Verify the number and try again.  
answer or is busy.  
The toner cartridge or the drum  
Re-install the toner cartridge or the drum unit  
unit and toner cartridge assembly that is indicated on the LCD.  
is not installed correctly.  
No Waste Toner  
Out of Memory  
The waste toner box is not  
installed correctly.  
Re-install the waste toner box. (See  
Replacing the waste toner box on page 181.)  
The machine’s memory is full.  
Fax sending or copy operation in  
progress  
Do one of the following:  
„ Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
send or copy the scanned pages.  
„ Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other  
operations in progress finish, and then try  
again.  
„ Clear the data from the memory. (See  
Out of memory message on page 45 or  
page 92.)  
Print operation in process  
Do one of the following:  
„ Reduce print resolution. (See Advanced  
tab in the Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.)  
„ Clear the faxes from the memory. (See  
Out of memory message on page 92.)  
145  
   
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Print Unable XX  
(XX=Error Code)  
The machine has a mechanical  
problem.  
Do one of the following:  
„ Disconnect the machine from the power  
for several minutes, then reconnect it.  
(The machine can be turned off for up to  
60 hours without losing faxes stored in  
the memory. See Transferring your faxes  
or Fax Journal report on page 148.)  
„ If the problem continues, call your  
Brother dealer.  
Print Unable 1A  
One of the issues that can cause Turn the power switch off and fully open the  
this error is that condensation top cover. Leave the machine off and open  
may form insidethe machine after for 30 minutes to remove any condensation  
a room temperature change.  
from inside the machine, then close the top  
cover and turn the machine on again. If this  
does not clear the error, call your dealer or a  
Brother Customer Service.  
Protected Device  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
Registration  
The protect switch of the USB  
Flash memory drive is on.  
Turn off the protect switch of the USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Registration failed.  
Press Mono Start or Colour Start and try  
again.  
Do one of the following:  
„ Turn off the machine’s power switch.  
Wait a few seconds, then turn it on again.  
„ Try Manual Registration, Menu, 4, 7.  
(See Manual Registration on page 165.)  
„ Put in a new belt unit. (See Replacing the  
belt unit on page 177.)  
„ If the problem continues, call your  
Brother dealer.  
Rename the File  
There is already a file on the USB Change the file name of the file on the USB  
Flash memory drive with the  
same name as the file you are  
trying to save.  
Flash memory drive or the file you are trying  
to save.  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
Replace Belt  
Replace Drums  
It is time to replace the belt unit.  
Replace the belt unit. (See Replacing the  
belt unit on page 177.)  
It is time to replace the drum  
units.  
Replace the drum units.  
(See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
Reset the drum unit counter.  
The drum unit counter was not  
reset when a new drum was  
installed.  
(See Resetting the drum counter  
on page 177.)  
Replace Drum(X)1  
It is time to replace the drum unit Replace the drum unit for the colour  
for the indicated colour.  
indicated on the LCD.  
(See Replacing the drum units on page 174.)  
146  
 
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Error Message  
Cause  
Action  
Replace Fuser  
It is time to replace the fuser unit. Call your Brother dealer to replace the fuser  
unit.  
Replace PF Kit  
Replace Toner  
It is time to replace the paper  
feeding kit.  
Call your Brother dealer to replace the  
PF Kit.  
The toner cartridge is at the end Replace the toner cartridge for the colour  
of its life.  
indicated on the LCD. (See Replacing a  
Toner cartridge on page 168.)  
C
Replace WT Box  
It is time to replace the waste  
toner box.  
Replace the waste toner box. (See  
Replacing the waste toner box on page 181.)  
Scan Unable XX  
The machine has a mechanical  
problem.  
„ Disconnect the machine from the power  
for several minutes, then reconnect it.  
(The machine can be turned off for up to  
60 hours without losing faxes stored in  
the memory. See Transferring your faxes  
or Fax Journal report on page 148.)  
(XX=Error Code)  
„ If the problem continues, call Brother  
Customer Service.  
Short paper  
The paper size detected is  
shorter than the paper size  
defined in the print job and the  
paper size being used requires  
the back cover to be open.  
Open the back cover (back output tray) and  
remove any printed pages. Leave the back  
cover open and press Mono Start or  
Colour Start.  
Size mismatch  
Small paper  
The paper in the tray is not the  
correct size.  
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and  
set the “Paper Size” (Menu, 1, 2, 2 (See  
Paper Size on page 24)).  
The paper size defined in the  
printer driver requires the back  
cover to be open.  
Open the back cover (back output tray) and  
press Mono Start or Colour Start. (See  
Printing on thick paper, labels, envelopes or  
small paper on page 13)  
Toner Low  
The toner cartridge is near the  
end of its life.  
Buy a new toner cartridge for the colour that  
is indicated on the LCD before you get a  
Replace Toner message.  
Too Many Files  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
Unusable Device  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
There are too many files stored  
on the USB Flash memory drive. USB Flash memory drive.  
Reduce the number of files stored on the  
An incompatible or broken device Remove the USB Flash memory drive from  
has been connected to the USB  
direct interface.  
the USB direct interface.  
WT Box End Soon  
The waste toner box is almost full. Buy a new waste toner box before you get a  
Replace WT Boxmessage.  
1
(X) shows the toner cartridge or drum unit colour that is near the end of its life. (K)=Black, (Y)=Yellow, (M)=Magenta,  
(C)=Cyan.  
147  
   
Transferring faxes to your PC  
C
Transferringyourfaxes or Fax  
Journal report  
You can transfer the faxes from your  
machine’s memory to your PC.  
C
If the LCD shows:  
a Make sure that you have installed  
MFL-Pro Suite on your PC, and then  
turn on PC-Fax Receiving on the PC.  
(For details about PC Fax Receive, see  
PC-FAX receiving in the Software  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.)  
„ Init Unable XX  
„ Print Unable XX  
„ Scan Unable XX  
We recommend transferring your faxes to  
another fax machine or to your PC. (See  
Transferring faxes to another fax machine  
on page 148 or Transferring faxes to your PC  
on page 148.)  
b Make sure that you have set  
PC Fax Receiveon the machine.  
(See PC Fax Receive on page 73.)  
If faxes are in the machine’s memory  
when you set up PC Fax Receive, the  
LCD will ask if you want to transfer the  
faxes to your PC.  
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report  
to see if there are any faxes you need to  
transfer. (See Transferring Fax Journal report  
to another fax machine on page 148.)  
c Do one of the following:  
Note  
„ To transfer all faxes to your PC,  
press 1. You will be asked if you want  
a backup print.  
If there is an error message on the  
machine’s LCD, after the faxes have been  
transferred, disconnect the machine from  
the power source for several minutes, and  
then reconnect it.  
„ To exit and leave the faxes in the  
memory, press 2.  
d Press Stop/Exit.  
Transferring faxes to another fax  
machine  
C
Transferring Fax Journal report to  
another fax machine  
C
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Enter  
personal information (station ID) in the Quick  
Setup Guide.)  
If you have not set up your Station ID, you  
cannot enter fax transfer mode. (See Enter  
personal information (station ID) in the Quick  
Setup Guide.)  
a Press Menu, 9, 0, 1.  
a Press Menu, 9, 0, 2.  
b Do one of the following:  
„ If the LCD shows No Data, there  
are no faxes left in the machine’s  
memory. Press Stop/Exit.  
b Enter the fax number to which the Fax  
Journal report will be forwarded.  
c Press Start.  
„ Enter the fax number to which faxes  
will be forwarded.  
c Press Mono Start or Colour Start.  
148  
         
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Document is jammed under the  
document cover  
Document jams  
C
C
If the document is jammed, follow the steps  
below.  
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
IMPORTANT  
After removing a jammed document,  
check that no paper scraps are left in the  
machine that could cause another jam.  
b Lift the document cover.  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
C
right.  
Document is jammed in the top of the  
ADF unit  
C
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Open the ADF cover.  
c Pull the jammed document out to the  
left.  
d Close the document cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Document is jammed at the output  
tray  
C
a Take out any paper from the ADF that is  
not jammed.  
b Pull the jammed document out to the  
d Close the ADF cover.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
right.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
149  
   
Paper is jammed in the Paper Tray  
C
Paper jams  
C
If the LCD shows Jam Tray, follow these  
steps:  
To clear paper jams, please follow the steps  
in this section.  
a Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
IMPORTANT  
Please confirm that you have installed all  
toner cartridges and drum units in the  
machine. Failure to install these items or  
incorrect installation may cause a paper  
jam in your Brother machine.  
Note  
If the error message remains, open and  
close the top cover and fuser cover firmly  
to reset the machine.  
b Use both hands to slowly pull out the  
Note  
jammed paper.  
The LCD names for the paper trays are as  
follows:  
• Standard paper tray: Tray  
• Manual Feed Slot: Manual Feed  
IMPORTANT  
If the paper cannot easily be removed in  
this direction, stop and follow the  
instructions for Paper is jammed inside the  
machine on page 153.  
Note  
Pulling out the jammed paper downwards  
allows you to remove the paper easier.  
150  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
c Make sure the paper is below the  
maximum paper mark (b) of the paper  
tray. While pressing the green paper-  
guide release lever, slide the paper  
guides to fit the paper size. Make sure  
that the guides are firmly in the slots  
(See Loading paper in the standard  
paper tray on page 11).  
b Press down the green lever and remove  
the paper.  
C
d Put the paper tray firmly back in the  
machine.  
e Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
resume printing.  
Paper is jammed at the output paper  
tray  
C
When the paper is jammed at the output  
paper tray, follow these steps:  
c Push the scanner down with both hands  
to close it.  
a Open the scanner using both hands.  
Note  
When the top cover is open, you cannot  
open the scanner.  
151  
d Using both hands, gently pull the  
Paper is jammed at the back of the  
machine  
jammed paper out of the fuser unit.  
C
If the LCD shows Jam Rear, a paper jam  
has occurred behind the face-up output tray.  
Follow these steps:  
a Turn off the machine's power switch.  
Unplug the telephone line cord first,  
disconnect all cables, and then unplug  
the power cord from the electrical  
socket.  
b Open the back cover.  
e Close the fuser cover (1).  
1
f Fully close the back cover.  
CAUTION  
g Plug the machine's power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine's power switch.  
HOT SURFACE  
After you have just used the machine, some  
internal parts of the machine will be  
extremely hot. Wait at least 10 minutes for  
the machine to cool down before attempting  
to clear the paper jam.  
c Push down and pull the green tabs at  
the left and right hand sides toward you  
and fold down the fuser cover (1).  
1
152  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
c Take out all the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assemblies. Repeat this for all  
the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assemblies.  
Paper is jammed inside the machine  
C
If the LCD shows Jam Inside, follow these  
steps:  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, disconnect all  
cables, and then unplug the power cord  
from the electrical socket.  
C
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
1
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assemblies on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
CAUTION  
HOT SURFACE  
After you have just used the machine, some  
internal parts of the machine will be  
extremely hot. Wait at least 10 minutes for  
the machine to cool down before attempting  
to clear the paper jam.  
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
153  
 
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
e Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
Repeat this for all the drum unit and  
toner cartridge assemblies.  
C
M
Y
K
d Pull out the jammed paper slowly.  
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
f Close the top cover.  
g Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine.  
154  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Cleaning the outside of the  
machine  
Routine maintenance  
C
C
Clean the outside and inside of the machine  
regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth. When you  
replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit,  
make sure that you clean the inside of the  
machine. If printed pages are stained with  
toner, clean the inside of the machine with a  
dry, lint-free cloth.  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, disconnect all  
cables, and then unplug the power cord  
from the electrical socket.  
C
b Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
machine.  
WARNING  
Use neutral detergents. Cleaning with  
volatile liquids such as thinner or benzine  
will damage the surface of the machine.  
DO NOT use any flammable substances,  
spray or organic solvent/liquids containing  
alcohol/ammonia to clean the inside or  
outside of the machine. Doing this may  
cause a fire or electrical shock. (For more  
information see Important Safety  
Instructions on page 114.)  
c Wipe the outside of the machine with a  
dry, lint-free soft cloth to remove dust.  
Be careful not to inhale toner.  
d Remove any paper that is in the paper  
tray.  
155  
     
e Wipe the inside and the outside of the  
paper tray with a dry, lint-free soft cloth  
to remove dust.  
c In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1)  
and the scanner glass strip (2)  
underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth  
moistened with water.  
1
2
f Re-load the paper and put the paper tray  
firmly back in the machine.  
d Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine.  
g Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine.  
Note  
Cleaning the scanner glass  
C
In addition to cleaning the scanner glass  
and glass strip with a soft lint-free cloth  
moistened with water, run your finger tip  
over the glass to see if you can feel  
anything on it. If you feel dirt or debris,  
clean the glass again concentrating on  
that area. You may need to repeat the  
cleaning process three or four times. To  
test, make a copy after each cleaning.  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, disconnect all  
cables and then unplug the power cord  
from the electrical socket.  
b Lift the document cover (1).  
Clean the white plastic surface (2) and  
scanner glass (3) underneath it with a  
soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.  
1
2
3
156  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
c Wipe the windows of the LED heads (1)  
with a dry, lint-free cloth. Be careful not  
to touch the windows of the LED  
Cleaning the LED heads  
WARNING  
C
heads (1) with your fingers.  
DO NOT use any flammable substances,  
spray or organic solvent/liquids containing  
alcohol/ammonia to clean the inside or  
outside of the machine. Doing this may  
cause a fire or electrical shock. For more  
information see Important Safety  
C
Instructions on page 119.  
1
1
d Close the top cover of the machine.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT touch the windows of the LED  
heads with your fingers.  
e Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and then plug  
in the telephone line cord. Turn on the  
machine.  
a Before you clean the inside of the  
machine, turn off the machine. Unplug  
the telephone line cord first, and then  
unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
1
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
157  
   
Cleaning the corona wires  
C
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
If you have print quality problems, clean the  
corona wires as follows:  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, disconnect all  
cables, and then unplug the power cord  
from the electrical socket.  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
1
d Clean the primary corona wire inside the  
drum unit by gently sliding the green tab  
from left to right and right to left several  
times.  
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
c Take out the drum unit and toner  
1
cartridge assemblies.  
Note  
Be sure to return the tab to the home  
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed  
pages may have a vertical stripe.  
158  
       
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
e Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
Cleaning the drum unit  
C
Small spots on the printed pages  
C
If your printout has any small white or  
coloured spots, follow the steps below to  
solve the problem.  
C
a Open the manual feed slot cover.  
C
M
Y
K
b Using both hands, slide the manual feed  
slot paper guides to the width of the  
paper that you are going to use.  
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
f Repeat steps c to e to clean the  
remaining corona wires.  
g Close the top cover of the machine.  
h Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and then  
reconnect all cables and telephone line  
cord. Turn on the machine.  
159  
       
c Using both hands, put one blank sheet  
of paper in the manual feed slot until the  
front edge of the paper touches the  
paper feed roller. Wait until the machine  
automatically feeds the paper. When  
you feel the machine pull in the paper,  
let go.  
e Press Mono Start or Colour Start. The  
machine will pull in the piece of paper  
and start cleaning the drum unit.  
Drum Cleaning  
Please Wait  
f When the machine has finished  
cleaning, Completed appears on the  
LCD. Press Stop/Exit so that the  
machine returns to the Ready mode.  
Note  
• Make sure that the paper is straight and in  
the correct position on the manual feed  
slot. If it is not, the paper may not be fed  
correctly, resulting in a paper jam.  
g Repeat steps c to f two more times  
using a new blank sheet of paper each  
time. Upon completion please discard  
the used paper. If the print problem is  
not resolved please contact your  
Brother dealer.  
• Do not put more than one piece of paper  
in the manual feed slot at any one time, as  
it may cause a jam.  
• If you put paper in the manual feed slot  
before the machine is in the Ready mode,  
an error may occur and the machine will  
stop printing.  
d Make sure that the machine is in the  
Ready mode.  
Press Menu, 4, 8.  
Drum Cleaning  
Press Start  
160  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
c See the print sample to identify the  
colour causing the problem. The colour  
of the spots is the colour of the drum you  
should clean. For example, if the spots  
are cyan, you should clean the drum for  
cyan. Take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly of the colour causing  
the problem.  
Large spots on the printed pages  
C
If your printout has coloured spots at 94 mm  
intervals, follow the steps below to solve the  
problem.  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, disconnect all  
cables, and then unplug the power cord  
from the electrical socket.  
C
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
1
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
161  
d Push down the green-labelled lock  
lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out  
of the drum unit.  
f Turn the drum unit gear by hand while  
looking at the surface of the OPC  
drum (1).  
1
1
IMPORTANT  
Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
g When you have found the mark on the  
drum that matches the print sample,  
wipe the surface of the OPC drum with a  
dry cotton swab until the dust or glue on  
the surface comes off.  
e Put the print sample in front of the drum  
unit, and find the exact position of the  
poor print.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT clean the surface of the  
photosensitive drum with a sharp object.  
162  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
h Put the toner cartridge back firmly into  
the drum unit until you hear it lock into  
place.  
i Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
C
h
C
M
Y
K
Note  
Make sure that you put in the toner  
cartridge correctly or it may separate from  
the drum unit.  
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
j Close the top cover of the machine.  
k Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and then  
reconnect all cables and telephone line  
cord. Turn on the machine.  
163  
d Wipe the two pick-up rollers (1) inside of  
Cleaning the paper pick-up  
rollers  
the machine to remove dust.  
C
If you have paper feed problems, clean the  
pick-up rollers as follows:  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the power  
cord from the electrical socket.  
b Pull the paper tray completely out of the  
1
machine.  
e Put the paper tray back in the machine.  
f Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket. Turn on the  
machine.  
Calibration  
C
The output density for each colour may vary  
depending on the environment the machine is  
in such as temperature and humidity.  
Calibration helps you to improve the colour  
density.  
c Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked  
in lukewarm water, and then wipe the  
separator pad (1) of the paper tray with  
it to remove dust.  
a Press Menu, 4, 5.  
b Press a or b to select Calibrate.  
c Press OK.  
1
d Press 1 to select Yes.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
You can reset the calibration parameters  
back to those set at the factory.  
a Press Menu, 4, 5.  
b Press a or b to Reset.  
c Press OK.  
d Press 1 to select Yes.  
164  
       
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Frequency  
C
You can set the machine to carry out auto  
registration regularly, and also how often it  
occurs.  
Note  
• If an error message is displayed, press  
Stop/Exit and try again. For more  
information, see Error and maintenance  
messages on page 142.  
a Press Menu, 4, 6, 2.  
b Press a or b to choose Low, Medium,  
• If you print using Windows® printer driver,  
you need to perform the calibration from  
C
Highor Off.  
Press OK.  
the Windows® printer driver. See  
Advanced tab in the Software User's  
Guide on the CD-ROM.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
• If you print using the Macintosh printer  
driver, you need to perform the calibration  
using the status monitor. See Status  
Monitor in the Software User's Guide on  
the CD-ROM. When the Status Monitor  
is open, choose Control / Color  
Manual Registration  
C
If colour still appears incorrectly after auto-  
registration, you will need to perform manual  
registration.  
a Press Menu, 4, 7, 1.  
Calibration from the menu bar.  
b Press Mono Start or Colour Start to  
start printing the colour registration  
chart.  
Auto Registration  
C
c When the machine has finished printing  
the registration sheet,  
Registration  
C
If solid areas of colour or images have cyan,  
magenta or yellow fringes, you can use the  
auto-registration feature to correct the  
problem.  
press 2 (Set Regist.) to correct the  
colour manually.  
d Starting at 1 (Magenta) on the chart,  
check which coloured bar has the most  
uniform print density and enter its  
number into the machine using the  
a and b keys.  
a Press Menu, 4, 6, 1.  
b To start, press 1.  
To exit, press 2.  
Press OK.  
Repeat for 2 (Cyan), 3 (Yellow), 4, 5, 6  
to 9.  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
165  
       
Replacing the consumable items  
C
The following messages appear on the LCD in the Ready mode. These messages provide  
advanced warnings to replace the consumable items before they reach the end of their life. To  
avoid any inconvenience, you may want to buy spare consumable items before the machine stops  
printing.  
LCD messages  
Consumable item Approximate life  
to replace  
How to replace  
Model name  
Toner Low  
Toner cartridge  
<Black>  
See page 168.  
TN-240BK,  
TN-240C,  
TN-240M,  
TN-240Y  
2,200 pages 1 2  
Prepare New X  
Toner Cartridge. Magenta, Yellow,  
X = Cyan,  
<Cyan, Magenta,  
Yellow>  
Black  
1,400 pages 1 2  
15,000 pages 1 3 4  
15,000 pages 1 3 4  
DR-240CL 5  
Drums End Soon 4 Drum units  
Drum End Soon(X) 1 Drum unit  
See page 173.  
See page 173.  
DR-240CL-BK 6,  
DR-240CL-CMY 7  
X = C, M, Y, K  
C = Cyan  
M = Magenta  
Y = Yellow  
K = Black  
50,000 pages 1  
50,000 pages 1  
Belt End Soon  
Belt unit  
See page 177.  
See page 181.  
BU-200CL  
WT-200CL  
WT Box End Soon Waste toner box  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.  
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
1 page per job.  
Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.  
Contains 4pc. Drum Set.  
Contains 1pc. Black Drum Unit.  
Contains 1pc. Colour Drum Unit.  
166  
               
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
You will need to replace certain parts and clean the machine regularly.  
LCD messages  
Consumable item Approximate life  
to replace  
How to replace  
Model name  
Replace Toner  
Toner cartridge  
<Black>  
See page 168.  
TN-240BK,  
TN-240C,  
TN-240M,  
TN-240Y  
2,200 pages 1 2  
<Cyan,  
C
Magenta,Yellow>  
1,400 pages 1 2  
15,000 pages 1 3 4  
15,000 pages 1 3 4  
DR-240CL 5  
Replace Drums  
4 Drum units  
See page 174.  
See page 174.  
DR-240CL-BK 6,  
DR-240CL-CMY 7  
Replace Drum(X) 1 Drum unit  
X = C, M, Y, K  
C = Cyan  
M = Magenta  
Y = Yellow  
K = Black  
Drum Error8  
15,000 pages 1 3 4  
50,000 pages 1  
50,000 pages 1  
50,000 pages 1  
Drum unit  
See page 174.  
See page 177.  
See page 181.  
Replace Belt  
Replace WT Box Waste toner box  
Replace Fuser Fuser unit  
Belt unit  
BU-200CL  
WT-200CL  
Call your dealer or Brother Customer  
Service for a replacement fuser unit.  
50,000 pages 1  
Replace PF Kit Paper feeding kit  
Call your dealer or Brother Customer  
Service for a replacement paper feeding  
kit.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.  
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
1 page per job.  
Drum life is approximate and may vary by type of use.  
Contains 4pc. Drum Set.  
Contains 1pc. Black Drum Unit.  
Contains 1pc. Colour Drum Unit.  
The Drum Errormessage has two cases: If the scroll message shows Replace the Drum Unit.you will need  
to replace the drum unit. If the scroll message shows Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit.you do not need  
to replace the drum unit, you just need to clean the corona wires. (See Cleaning the corona wires on page 158.)  
167  
                 
Note  
• Discard used consumable items according to local regulations, keeping it separate from  
domestic waste. If you have questions, call your local waste disposal office. Be sure to reseal  
the consumable items tightly so that the material inside does not spill.  
• We recommend placing used consumable items on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally  
spilling or scattering the material inside.  
• If you use paper that is not a direct equivalent for the recommended paper, the life of  
consumable items and machine parts may be reduced.  
• The projected life of the cartridge is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement will  
vary depending on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage and type of media  
used.  
Toner Low message  
C
Replacing a Toner cartridge  
C
Toner Low  
Prepare...  
The Standard toner cartridges can print  
approximately 2,200 pages (black) or  
approximately 1,400 pages (yellow, magenta,  
cyan) 1. Actual page count will vary  
depending on your average type of  
document. The machine is supplied with a  
Starter toner cartridge that will need to be  
replaced after approximately 1,000 pages 1.  
When a toner cartridge is running low, the  
LCD shows Toner Low.  
If the LCD shows Toner Low  
Prepare New X Toner Cartridge.,  
the machine has nearly run out of toner. Buy  
a new toner cartridge and have it ready  
before you get a Replace Toner message.  
The LCD shows the toner colour that is near  
the end of its life (Black, Yellow, Magenta or  
Cyan).  
1
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance  
with ISO/IEC 19798.  
Replace Toner message  
C
Note  
When the following message appears on the  
LCD, you need to replace the toner cartridge:  
• It is a good idea to keep a new toner  
cartridge ready for use when you see the  
Toner Low warning.  
Replace Toner  
• To ensure high quality printing, we  
recommend that use only Genuine  
Brother Brand toner cartridges. When you  
want to buy toner cartridges, please call  
your Brother dealer.  
The scrolling message on the LCD indicates  
which colour you need to replace.  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, and then  
unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
• We recommend that you clean the  
machine when you replace the toner  
cartridge. See Routine maintenance  
on page 155.  
• If you change the print density setting for  
lighter or darker printing, the amount of  
toner used will change.  
• Wait to unpack the toner cartridge until  
immediately before you put it into the  
machine.  
168  
     
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
d Push down the green-labelled lock  
lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out  
of the drum unit.  
the handle (1).  
1
C
1
WARNING  
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It  
could explode, resulting in injuries.  
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
DO NOT use cleaning materials that  
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of  
spray or any type of flammable substance  
to clean the inside or outside of the  
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or  
electrical shock. See Routine maintenance  
on page 155 for how to clean the machine.  
c Take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly for the colour shown  
on the LCD.  
Be careful not to inhale toner.  
169  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat, level, stable surface with a  
sheet of disposable paper or cloth  
underneath it in case you accidentally spill  
or scatter toner.  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
Note  
• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge  
tightly in a suitable bag so that toner  
powder does not spill out of the cartridge.  
• Discard used consumable items  
according to local regulations. If you  
choose not to return your used  
consumable, please discard the used  
consumable according to local  
regulations, keeping it separate from  
domestic waste. If you have questions,  
call your local waste disposal office.  
e Clean the primary corona wire inside the  
drum unit by gently sliding the green tab  
from left to right and right to left several  
times.  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
1
Note  
Be sure to return the tab to the home  
position (a) (1). If you do not, printed  
pages may have a vertical stripe.  
170  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
f Unpack the new toner cartridge. Gently  
shake it from side to side several times  
to distribute the toner evenly inside the  
cartridge.  
IMPORTANT  
Brother machines are designed to work  
with toner of a particular specification and  
will work to a level of optimum performance  
when used with genuine Brother toner  
cartridges  
(TN-240BK/TN-240C/TN-240M/TN-240Y)  
Brother cannot guarantee this optimum  
.
C
performance if toner or toner cartridges of  
other specifications are used. Brother does  
not therefore recommend the use of  
cartridges other than genuine Brother  
cartridges with this machine, or the refilling  
of empty cartridges with toner from other  
sources. If damage is caused to the drum  
unit or other part of this machine as a result  
of the use of toner or toner cartridges other  
than genuine Brother products due to the  
incompatibility or lack of suitability of those  
products with this machine, any repairs  
required as a result may not be covered by  
the warranty.  
IMPORTANT  
• Unpack the toner cartridge just before you  
put it in the machine. If a toner cartridge is  
left unpacked for a long time, the toner life  
will be shortened.  
• If an unpacked drum unit is put in direct  
sunlight or room light, the unit may be  
damaged.  
g Pull off the protective cover.  
CAUTION  
HOT SURFACE  
Put the toner cartridge in the drum unit  
immediately after you have removed the  
protective cover. To prevent any  
degradation to the print quality, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
171  
h Put the new toner cartridge firmly into  
the drum unit until you hear it lock into  
place.  
i Slide the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
h
C
M
Y
K
Note  
Make sure that you put in the toner  
cartridge correctly or it may separate from  
the drum unit.  
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
j Close the top cover of the machine.  
172  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
k Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and the telephone line cord.  
Turn on the machine.  
Drum End Soon messages  
C
Drums End Soon  
If the LCD shows Drums End Soon, it  
means the drum kit is near the end of its life.  
Buy a new drum kit (DR-240CL) and have it  
ready before you get a Replace Drums  
message. To replace the drum units, see  
Replacing the drum units on page 174.  
Note  
DO NOT turn off the machine or open the  
top cover until the LCD returns to the  
Ready mode.  
C
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
While removing the drum unit, handle it  
carefully because it may contain toner. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
For best performance, use only Genuine  
Brother drum units and Genuine Brother  
toner units. Printing with a third-party drum  
unit or toner unit may reduce not only the  
print quality but also the quality and life of  
the printer itself. Warranty coverage may  
not apply to problems caused by the use  
of a third-party drum unit or toner unit.  
Drum units  
C
A new drum kit (model no. DR-240CL) can  
print approximately 15,000 A4 or Letter size  
single-sided pages. The DR-240CL drum kit  
contains 4 drum units - 1 Black  
Note  
(DR-240CL-BK) and 3 Color  
Drum End Soon(X)  
(DR-240CL-CMY). As the drums rotate in  
unison during the various stages of operation  
(even if you are only printing in one colour)  
and because damage to a single drum unit is  
not likely, you will need to replace all of the  
drums at once. We have no control over the  
many factors that determine the actual drum  
life, therefore we cannot guarantee a  
minimum number of pages that will be printed  
by your drum. The printer should be used only  
in a clean, dust-free environment with  
adequate ventilation. Drum wear and tear  
occurs due to use and rotation of the drum  
and interaction with paper, toner and other  
materials in the paper path.  
If only a specified drum is near the end of  
its life, the LCD shows the  
Drum End Soon(X) message. (X)  
indicates the drum unit colour that is near  
the end of its life. ((K) =Black, (Y)=Yellow,  
(M)=Magenta, (C)=Cyan). Call your  
Brother dealer to buy a new drum unit  
DR-240CL-BK (for Black) or a  
DR-240CL-CMY (for either Y, M, C  
colours) and have it ready before you get  
a Replace Drums message. During the  
normal lifespan of a drum kit the  
Drum End Soon(X) message will not  
appear. The message will only refer to a  
specific drum if a single unit has been  
replaced previously due to damage or  
error.  
When a drum reaches the factory-established  
rotation limit corresponding to the rated page  
yield, the product LCD display will advise you  
to replace the applicable drum(s). The  
product will continue to function, however,  
print quality may not be optimal.  
173  
   
Replace Drums messages  
C
Note  
When the following message appears on the  
LCD, you need to replace the drum kit:  
If only the specified drum needs to be  
replaced, the LCD shows the  
Replace Drum(X)message. (X)  
indicates the drum unit colour that you  
need to replace. ((K)=Black, (Y)=Yellow,  
(M)=Magenta, (C)=Cyan). During the  
normal lifespan of a drum kit the Replace  
Drum (X) message will not appear. The  
message will only refer to a specific drum  
if a single unit has been replaced  
Replace Drums  
Drum Error  
<Scrolling message>  
previously due to damage or error.  
Replace the Drum Unit. Black/ Cyan/  
Magenta/ Yellow. Refer to the  
1
User’s Guide.  
Replacing the drum units  
C
1
Only the colour you need to replace will be shown  
IMPORTANT  
• While removing the drum unit, handle it  
carefully because it may contain toner. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
The Drum Error message has two cases: If  
the scrolling message shows  
Replace the Drum Unit.you will need  
to replace the drum unit. If the scrolling  
message shows  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
Slide the Green tab on Drum Unit.  
you do not need to replace the drum unit, you  
just need to clean the corona wires. (See  
Cleaning the corona wires on page 158.)  
• Every time you replace the drum unit,  
clean the inside of the printer. (See  
Routine maintenance on page 155.)  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, and then  
unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
IMPORTANT  
For best performance, use only Genuine  
Brother drum units and Genuine Brother  
toner units. Printing with a third-party drum  
unit or toner unit may reduce not only the  
print quality but also the quality and life of  
the printer itself. Warranty coverage may  
not apply to problems caused by the use  
of a third-party drum unit or toner unit.  
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
1
174  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
WARNING  
DO NOT put a toner cartridge into a fire. It  
could explode, resulting in injuries.  
DO NOT use cleaning materials that  
contain ammonia, alcohol, any type of  
spray, or any type of flammable substance  
to clean the outside or inside of the  
c Take out the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assembly for the colour shown  
on the LCD.  
C
machine. Doing this may cause a fire or  
electrical shock. See Routine maintenance  
on page 155 for how to clean the machine.  
Be careful not to inhale toner.  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
d Push down the green-labeled lock  
lever (1) and take the toner cartridge out  
of the drum unit.  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
1
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
175  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
e Unpack the new drum unit and remove  
the protective cover.  
IMPORTANT  
Unpack the drum unit just before you put it  
in the machine. Exposure to direct sunlight  
or room light may damage the drum unit.  
f Put the toner cartridge firmly into the new  
drum unit until you hear it lock into place.  
Note  
• Be sure to seal up the toner cartridge  
tightly in a suitable bag so that toner  
powder does not spill out of the cartridge.  
h
• Discard used consumable items  
according to local regulations. If you  
choose not to return your used  
consumable, please discard the used  
consumable according to local  
regulations, keeping it separate from  
domestic waste. If you have questions,  
call your local waste disposal office.  
IMPORTANT  
Make sure that you put in the toner  
cartridge correctly or it may separate from  
the drum unit.  
176  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
g Slide the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
Resetting the drum counter  
C
When you replace a drum unit with a new  
one, you need to reset the drum counter by  
completing the following steps:  
a Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine.  
C
b (For MFC-9320CW) Press Menu, 8, 4.  
(For MFC-9120CN) Press Menu, 6, 4.  
c Press a or b to choose the colour of the  
drum you replaced. Press OK.  
d Press 1 to reset the drum unit counter.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
C
Replacing the belt unit  
C
M
Y
K
Model name BU-200CL  
A new belt unit can print approximately  
50,000 A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.  
Belt End Soon message  
C
Belt End Soon  
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
h Close the top cover of the machine.  
If the LCD shows Belt End Soon, it means  
the belt unit is near the end of its life. Buy a  
new belt unit and have it ready before you get  
a Replace Beltmessage.  
Replace Belt message  
C
When the following message appears on the  
LCD, you need to replace the belt unit:  
Replace Belt  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT touch the surface of the belt unit.  
•
If you touch it, it could degrade print quality.  
• Damage caused by incorrect handling of  
the belt unit may void your warranty.  
177  
     
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, and then  
unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
c Take out all the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assemblies.  
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
1
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
178  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
d Hold the green handle of the belt unit  
and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.  
C
h
179  
e Unpack the new belt unit and put the  
IMPORTANT  
new belt unit in the machine.  
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustration.  
h
180  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
f Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
Repeat this for all the drum unit and  
toner cartridge assemblies.  
When you replace a belt unit with a new  
one, you need to reset the belt unit  
counter by completing the following  
steps:  
C
a Plug the machine’s power cord back into  
the electrical socket first, and reconnect  
all cables and telephone line cord. Turn  
on the machine.  
C
b (For MFC-9320CW) Press Menu, 8, 4.  
(For MFC-9120CN) Press Menu, 6, 4.  
c Press a or b to select Belt Unit.  
Press OK.  
d Press 1 to reset the belt unit counter.  
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Replacing the waste toner  
box  
C
C
M
Y
K
Model name WT-200CL  
A new waste toner box can print  
approximately 50,000 A4 or Letter size  
single-sided pages.  
WT Box End Soon message  
C
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
WT Box End Soon  
g Close the top cover of the machine.  
If the LCD shows WT Box End Soon, it  
means the waste toner box is near the end of  
its life. Buy a new waste toner box and have  
it ready before you get a Replace WT Box  
message.  
181  
   
Replace WT Box message  
C
IMPORTANT  
When the scanner is open, you cannot  
open the top cover.  
When the following message appears on the  
LCD, you need to replace the waste toner  
box:  
Replace WT Box  
c Take out all the drum unit and toner  
cartridge assemblies.  
IMPORTANT  
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.  
WARNING  
DO NOT put the waste toner box into a fire.  
It could explode.  
Be careful not to spill the toner. DO NOT  
inhale or allow it to get into your eyes.  
IMPORTANT  
• We recommend that you place the drum  
unit and toner cartridge assembly on a  
clean, flat surface with a sheet of  
a Turn off the machine. Unplug the  
telephone line cord first, and then  
unplug the power cord from the  
electrical socket.  
disposable paper or cloth underneath it in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
b Fully open the top cover by lifting up on  
the handle (1).  
• To prevent damage to the machine from  
static electricity, DO NOT touch the  
electrodes shown in the illustration.  
1
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If  
toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
182  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustrations.  
d Hold the green handle of the belt unit  
and lift the belt unit up, then pull it out.  
C
h
183  
e Remove the orange packing material  
IMPORTANT  
and discard it.  
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT  
touch the shaded parts shown in the  
illustration.  
h
Note  
This step is only necessary when you are  
replacing the waste toner box for the first  
time. The orange packing is installed at  
the factory to protect your machine during  
shipment. The orange packing is not  
required for replacement waste toner  
boxes.  
184  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
f Hold the green handle of the waste toner  
box and remove the waste toner box  
from the machine.  
h Put the belt unit in the machine.  
C
h
CAUTION  
Handle the waste toner box carefully in  
case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.  
If toner scatters on your hands or clothes,  
wipe or wash it off with cold water at once.  
Note  
Discard the used waste toner box  
according to local regulations, keeping it  
separate from domestic waste. If you have  
questions, call your local waste disposal  
office.  
g Unpack the new waste toner box and  
put it in the machine.  
185  
i Slide each drum unit and toner cartridge  
assembly into the machine. Make sure  
that you match the toner cartridge colour  
to the same colour label on the machine.  
Repeat this for all the drum unit and  
toner cartridge assemblies.  
Replacing periodic  
maintenance parts  
C
The periodic maintenance parts will need to  
be replaced regularly to maintain the print  
quality. The parts listed below will have to be  
replaced after printing approximately  
50,000 pages 1. Please call your Brother  
dealer when the following messages appear  
on the LCD.  
1
A4 or Letter size single-sided pages.  
LCD message Description  
Replace PF Kit Replace the paper feeding kit  
for the paper tray.  
Replace Fuser  
Replace the fuser unit.  
C
M
Y
K
C-Cyan M-Magenta Y-Yellow K-Black  
j Close the top cover of the machine.  
186  
   
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
Reset Functions  
C
Machine Information  
C
The following reset functions are available:  
Checking the Serial Number  
C
1 Network  
You can reset the print server back to its  
default factory settings such as the  
password and IP address information.  
You can see the machine’s Serial Number on  
the LCD.  
a (For MFC-9320CW) Press Menu, 8, 1.  
(For MFC-9120CN) Press Menu, 6, 1.  
C
2 Address & Fax  
Address & Fax resets the following  
settings:  
b Press Stop/Exit.  
„ Address Book  
Checking the Page Counters  
C
(One Touch Dial/Speed Dial/Setup  
Groups)  
You can see the machine’s Page Counters  
for copies, printed pages, reports and lists,  
faxes or a summary total.  
„ Programmed fax jobs in the memory  
(Polled TX, Delayed Fax)  
„ Station ID  
a (For MFC-9320CW) Press Menu, 8, 2.  
(For MFC-9120CN) Press Menu, 6, 2.  
(name and number)  
„ Coverpage Msg  
b Press a or b to see Total, Fax/List,  
Copyor Print.  
(comments)  
„ Remote Fax Option  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage,  
Fax Forwarding and PC-Fax)  
Checking the remaining life of  
parts  
„ Report settings  
C
(Transmission Verification Report/Tel  
Index List/Fax Journal)  
You can see the machine’s parts life on the  
LCD.  
„ Setting Lock password  
3 All Settings  
a (For MFC-9320CW) Press Menu, 8, 3.  
(For MFC-9120CN) Press Menu, 6, 3.  
You can reset all the machine settings  
back to the settings that were set at the  
factory.  
Machine Info.  
3.Parts Life  
b Press a or b to choose 1.Drum,  
2.Belt Unit, 3.PF Kitor  
4.Fuser.  
Brother strongly recommends you  
perform this operation when you dispose  
of the machine.  
Press OK.  
Note  
c Press Stop/Exit.  
Unplug the interface cable before you  
choose Networkor All Settings.  
187  
           
How to reset the machine  
C
Packing and shipping  
the machine  
C
a (for New Zealand) Press Menu, 0, 6.  
Press Menu, 0, 7.  
When you transport the machine, use the  
packing materials that came with your  
machine. If you do not pack the machine  
correctly, you could void your warranty.  
Initial Setup  
7.Reset  
b Press a or b to choose the reset function  
you want to use.  
CAUTION  
Press OK.  
When shipping the machine, each drum  
unit / toner cartridge assembly and the  
waste toner box must be removed from the  
machine and put in a plastic bag. Failure to  
remove these items and put them in plastic  
bags before shipping may cause severe  
damage to the machine and may void the  
warranty.  
c Do one of the following;  
„ To reset the settings, press 1 and go  
to step d.  
„ To exit without making changes,  
press 2 and go to step e.  
d You will be asked to reboot the machine.  
Do one of the following;  
„ To reboot the machine press 1. The  
Make sure that you have the following parts  
for repacking:  
machine will begin the reset.  
„ To exit without rebooting the  
machine, press 2. Go to step e.  
1
e Press Stop/Exit.  
Note  
You can also reset the Network settings by  
2
3
pressing Menu  
,
7
,
0
(for MFC-9320CW) or  
Menu (for MFC-9120CN).  
,
5
,
0
1
Plastic bags – to be supplied by you, the  
user; one for the waste toner box, and one  
each for the four drum and toner cartridge  
assemblies  
2
3
Protective covers that were attached to the  
original drum and toner cartridge  
assemblies  
Packing material for locking the belt unit  
188  
       
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
This machine is heavy and weighs  
DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in  
the illustration.  
approximately 22.9 kg. To prevent injuries  
use at least two people to lift the machine.  
Be careful not to pinch your fingers when  
you put the machine back down.  
C
IMPORTANT  
Make sure that the machine has fully  
cooled down by leaving it disconnected  
from the power for at least 30 minutes  
before packing.  
a Turn off the machine.  
b Unplug the machine from the telephone  
wall socket.  
c Unplug all the cables and AC power  
cord from the machine.  
d Fully open the top cover and take out all  
the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assemblies.  
189  
e Attach the protective cover to each of  
the drum unit and toner cartridge  
assemblies.  
h Remove the waste toner box from the  
machine, and then put it in a plastic bag  
and seal the bag completely.  
f Put each assembly into a plastic bag  
and completely seal each bag.  
g Remove the belt unit by holding the  
green handle and lifting the belt unit up  
and out of the machine.  
i Reinstall the belt unit back in the  
machine.  
h
h
190  
Troubleshooting and routine maintenance  
j Reinstall the original packing material  
n Put the machine and the Styrofoam  
pieces into the carton. Match the front  
side of the machine to the “FRONT”  
mark on the Styrofoam pieces. Put the  
Styrofoam pieces for the drum unit and  
toner cartridge assemblies on the top of  
the machine.  
into the machine.  
C
k Close the top cover.  
o Put the power cord, and the three  
remaining drum unit and toner cartridge  
assemblies into the Styrofoam pieces as  
shown in the illustration.  
l Put the waste toner box and one drum  
unit and toner cartridges assembly in  
the Styrofoam piece.  
m Using two people, place the machine  
into the plastic bag.  
191  
p Put the four carton trays on the top.  
q Close the carton and tape it shut.  
192  
Menu and features  
D
D
On-screen  
programming  
Menu keys  
D
D
Your machine has been designed to be easy  
to use. The LCD provides on-screen  
programming using the menu keys.  
We have created step by step on-screen  
instructions to help you program your  
machine. Simply follow the steps as they  
guide you through the menu selections and  
programming options.  
D
Access the menu.  
Menu table  
D
Go to the next menu level.  
Accept an option.  
You can program your machine by using the  
Menu table on page 195. These pages list  
the menu selections and options.  
Exit the menu by pressing  
repeatedly.  
Press Menu followed by the menu numbers  
to program your machine.  
Go back to the previous  
menu level.  
For example, to set Beepervolume to Low:  
a Press Menu, 1, 3, 2.  
Scroll through the current  
menu level.  
b Press a or b to choose Low.  
c Press OK.  
Go back to the previous  
menu level or forward to the  
next menu level.  
Memory storage  
D
Exit the menu or stop the  
current operation.  
Your menu settings are stored permanently,  
and in the event of a power failure will not be  
lost. Temporary settings (for example,  
Contrast, Overseas Mode) will be lost. The  
machine can store the date and time up to  
60 hours.  
193  
         
e Press OK.  
When you have finished setting an  
How to access the menu  
mode  
D
option, the LCD will show Accepted.  
f Press Stop/Exit to exit Menu mode.  
a Press Menu.  
b Choose an option.  
MFC-9120CN:  
„ Press 1 for General Setup menu.  
„ Press 2 for Fax menu.  
„ Press 3 for Copy menu.  
„ Press 4 for Printer menu.  
„ Press 5 for Network menu.  
„ Press 6 for Machine Info. menu.  
„ Press 9 for Service menu. 1  
„ Press 0 for Initial Setup menu.  
MFC-9320CW:  
„ Press 1 for General Setup menu.  
„ Press 2 for Fax menu.  
„ Press 3 for Copy menu.  
„ Press 4 for Printer menu.  
„ Press 5 for USB Direct I/F menu.  
„ Press 6 for Print Reports menu.  
„ Press 7 for Network menu.  
„ Press 8 for Machine Info. menu.  
„ Press 9 for Service menu. 1  
„ Press 0 for Initial Setup menu.  
1
This will appear only when the LCD shows an  
error message.  
You can also scroll through each menu  
level by pressing a or b for the direction  
you want.  
c Press OK when the option you want  
appears on the LCD.  
The LCD will then show the next menu  
level.  
d Press a or b to scroll to your next menu  
selection.  
194  
   
Menu and features  
Menu table  
D
The factory settings are shown in Bold with an asterisk.  
Choose & OK  
Choose & OK  
to accept  
to exit  
D
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
0 Sec  
30 Secs  
1 Min  
2 Mins*  
5 Mins  
Off  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General 1.Mode Timer  
Setup  
—
Sets the time to  
return to Fax mode  
and the time the  
machine will change  
from individual user  
to public user mode  
when using Secure  
Function Lock.  
24  
2.Paper  
1.Paper Type  
Thin  
Sets the type of  
paper in the paper  
tray.  
24  
24  
Plain*  
Thick  
Thicker  
Recycled Paper  
2.Paper Size  
A4*  
Sets the size of the  
paper in the paper  
tray.  
Letter  
Legal  
Executive  
A5  
A5 L  
A6  
B5  
B6  
Folio  
Off  
3.Volume  
1.Ring  
Adjusts the ring  
volume.  
25  
Low  
Med*  
High  
195  
   
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Off  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General 3.Volume  
Setup  
2.Beeper  
Adjusts the volume  
level of the beeper.  
25  
(Continued)  
Low  
(Continued)  
Med*  
High  
Off  
3.Speaker  
Adjusts the speaker  
volume.  
25  
Low  
Med*  
High  
On  
4.Daylight Save  
—
Changes for Daylight  
Savings Time  
manually.  
26  
26  
26  
Off  
5.Ecology  
1.Toner Save  
2.Sleep Time  
On  
Increases the page  
yield of the toner  
cartridge.  
Off*  
Range varies  
depending on  
model.  
Conserves power.  
005Min*  
6.LCD Contrast  
—
b -nnnno+ a  
Adjusts the contrast  
of the LCD.  
27  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
—
7.Security  
1.Memory Security  
(MFC-9120CN only)  
Stops unauthorized  
users from most  
operations except  
receiving faces into  
the memory.  
32  
29  
—
—
Can restrict selected  
machine operation  
for up to 25 individual  
users and all other  
non-authorized  
1.Function Lock  
(MFC-9320CW only)  
Public users.  
2.Setting Lock  
Stops unauthorized  
users from changing  
the machine’s  
34  
current settings.  
196  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
A4*  
Descriptions  
Page  
1.General  
Setup  
8.Document  
Scan  
1.Glass ScanSize  
Adjusts the scan  
area of the scanner  
glass to the size of  
the document.  
38  
Letter  
(Continued)  
2.File Size 1.Color  
Small  
You can set your own  
default settings of the  
data compression  
rate.  
See  
Software  
Middle*  
Large  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
2.Gray  
Small  
CD-ROM  
.
Middle*  
Large  
D
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
2.Fax  
1.Setup Receive  
1.Ring Delay  
(02- 10)  
02*  
Sets the number of  
rings before the  
machine answers in  
Fax Only or Fax/Tel  
mode.  
48  
(In Fax mode only)  
(Example for the  
Australia)  
2.F/T Ring Time 20 Secs  
30 Secs*  
Sets the  
pseudo/double-ring  
time in Fax/Tel mode.  
48  
40 Secs  
70 Secs  
3.Fax Detect On*  
Receives fax  
messages without  
pressing Start.  
49  
61  
Off  
4.Remote Codes  
Allows you to answer  
all calls at an  
extension or external  
phone and use codes  
to turn the machine on  
or off. You can  
On(l51, #51)  
Off*  
(l91, #91 for  
New Zealand)  
personalize these  
codes.  
5.Auto Reduction On*  
Cuts the size of  
incoming faxes.  
50  
50  
Off  
6.Memory Receive On*  
Automatically stores  
any incoming faxes in  
memory if it runs out of  
paper.  
Off  
7.Print Density b -onn+ a  
b -non+ a*  
Makes printouts  
darker or lighter.  
49  
79  
50  
b -nno+ a  
8.Polling RX Standard*  
Sets up your machine  
to poll another fax  
machine.  
Secure  
Timer  
9.Fax Rx Stamp  
On  
Prints the received  
time and date on the  
top of the received  
faxes.  
Off*  
197  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
2.Fax  
2.Setup Send  
1.Contrast  
Auto*  
Light  
Dark  
Changes the lightness  
or darkness of faxes  
you send.  
42  
(Continued)  
(In Fax mode only)  
2.Fax Resolution Standard*  
Sets the default  
resolution for outgoing  
faxes.  
42  
Fine  
S.Fine  
Photo  
3.Delayed Fax  
4.Batch TX  
—
Sets the time of day in  
24 hour format that the  
delayed faxes will be  
sent.  
44  
44  
On  
Combines delayed  
faxes going to the  
same fax number at  
the same time of day  
into one transmission.  
Off*  
5.Real Time TX  
6.Polled TX  
Next Fax:On  
Next Fax:Off  
On  
Sends a fax without  
using the memory.  
43  
Off*  
Standard*  
Sets up your machine  
with a document to be  
retrieved by another  
fax machine.  
80  
41  
Secure  
7.Coverpg Setup Next Fax:On  
Automatically sends a  
cover page you have  
programmed.  
Next Fax:Off  
On  
Off*  
Print Sample  
8.Coverpage Note  
—
Sets up your own  
comments for the fax  
cover page.  
41  
44  
9.Overseas Mode On  
Off*  
If you are having  
difficulty sending  
faxes overseas, set  
this to On.  
198  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
2.Fax  
3.Address Book  
1.One Touch Dial  
—
—
—
Stores up to 8 One  
Touch Dial numbers,  
so you can dial by  
pressing one key (and  
Start).  
65  
(Continued)  
2.Speed Dial  
Stores up to 200  
66  
Speed Dial numbers,  
so you can dial by  
pressing only a few  
keys (and Start).  
3.Setup Groups  
1.Transmission  
Sets up to 20 Group  
numbers for  
Broadcasting.  
69  
82  
D
4.Report Setting  
On  
Sets initial setup for  
Transmission  
Verification Report.  
On+Image  
Off*  
Off+Image  
2.Journal Period Off  
Every 50 Faxes*  
Sets the interval for  
automatic printing of  
the Fax Journal.  
83  
Every 6 Hours  
Every 12 Hours  
Every 24 Hours  
Every 2 Days  
Every 7 Days  
5.Remote Fax Opt  
1.Forward/Store Off*  
Sets the machine to  
forward fax  
72  
Fax Forward  
Fax Storage  
PC Fax Receive  
messages, to store  
incoming faxes in the  
memory (so you can  
retrieve them while  
you are away from  
your machine), or to  
send faxes to your PC.  
(Backup Print)  
If you chose Fax  
Forward or PC Fax  
Receive, you can turn  
on the safety feature  
Backup Print.  
2.Remote Access ---l  
3.Print Document  
Sets your own code  
for Remote Retrieval.  
75  
51  
—
Prints incoming faxes  
stored in the memory.  
199  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
2.Fax  
6.Dial Restrict. 1.Dial Pad  
Off*  
You can set the  
machine to restrict  
dialling when using  
the dial pad.  
35  
Enter # twice  
On  
(Continued)  
2.One Touch Dial Off*  
You can set the  
35  
machine to restrict the  
Enter # twice  
On  
dialling of One Touch  
numbers.  
3.Speed Dial Off*  
You can set the  
machine to restrict the  
dialling of Speed Dial  
numbers.  
35  
45  
Enter # twice  
On  
7.Remaining Jobs  
0.Miscellaneous  
—
—
You can check which  
jobs are in the memory  
and lets you cancel  
scheduled jobs.  
1.Compatibility High*  
Adjusts the  
141  
equalization for  
transmission  
difficulties.  
Normal  
Basic(for VoIP)  
VoIPserviceproviders  
offer fax support using  
various standards. If  
you regularly  
experience fax  
transmission errors,  
choose  
Basic(for VoIP).  
2.Distinctive On  
Use with telephone  
company distinctive  
ringing service allows  
you to have a voice  
number and fax  
54  
54  
Off*  
(Not available in  
New Zealand)  
number on the one  
telephone line.  
2.Faxability On  
If you have FaxAbility  
from Telecom, you can  
use this function to  
store the ringing  
Off*  
(For New Zealand  
Only)  
pattern of your fax  
number. And if you set  
in to ON, you should  
use the registered  
number only.  
3.Caller ID  
Display#  
View or print a list of  
the last 30 Caller IDs  
stored in the memory.  
57  
Print Report  
200  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
3.Copy  
1.Quality  
—
Text  
You can choose the  
Copy resolution for  
your type of document.  
89  
Photo  
Auto*  
2.Brightness  
3.Contrast  
—
b -nnnno+ a  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
b -nnnno+ a  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
Adjust the brightness  
for copies.  
90  
89  
—
Adjusts the contrast  
for copies.  
D
You can change to the  
higherCopyresolution  
when you make a text  
copy with 100% ratio  
using the scanner  
glass.  
4.Color Adjust  
1.Red  
2.Green  
3.Blue  
—
b -nnnno+ a  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
b -nnnno+ a  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
b -nnnno+ a  
b -nnnon+ a  
b -nnonn+ a*  
b -nonnn+ a  
b -onnnn+ a  
Auto*  
Adjusts the red colour  
for copies.  
90  
Adjusts the green  
colour for copies.  
Adjusts the blue  
colour for copies.  
4.Printer  
1.Emulation  
Chooses the  
See  
emulation mode.  
Software  
HP LaserJet  
BR-Script 3  
User  
’s  
Guide on  
2.Print Options  
1.Internal Font 1.HP LaserJet  
Prints a list of the  
machine’s internal  
fonts.  
the  
2.BR-Script 3  
CD-ROM.  
2.Configuration  
—
Prints a list of the  
machine’s printer  
settings.  
3.Test Print  
—
Prints a test page.  
3.Output Color  
—
Auto*  
Color  
B&W  
Chooses colour or  
black & white printed  
documents. If you  
choose Auto, the  
machine selects a  
suitable option for the  
document (colour or  
B&W).  
201  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
4.Printer  
4.Reset Printer  
—
1.Reset  
Restores the printer  
settings to the original  
factory default  
See  
Software  
(Continued)  
User  
’s  
2.Exit  
settings.  
Guide on  
the  
CD-ROM.  
5.Calibration  
6.Auto Regist.  
—
Calibrate  
Reset  
Adjusts the colour  
density or returns the  
colour calibration to  
the factory settings.  
164  
1.Registration 1.Start  
Adjust the print  
165  
position of each colour  
automatically.  
2.Exit  
2.Frequency  
Low  
Set the interval time  
you want to carry out  
the auto registration.  
Medium*  
High  
Off  
7.Manual Regist. 1.Print Chart  
—
Print the chart to  
manually check the  
registration of the  
colours.  
165  
2.Set Regist. 1 Magenta  
2 Cyan  
Sets the correction  
value on the chart you  
printed from  
3 Yellow  
Print Chart.  
4 Magenta  
5 Cyan  
6 Yellow  
7 Magenta  
8 Cyan  
9 Yellow  
8.Drum Cleaning  
1.Direct Print  
—
—
Carry out cleaning the  
drum unit to improve  
the print quality  
problem.  
159  
99  
5.USB Direct  
I/F  
1.Paper Size A4*  
Letter  
Sets the paper size  
when printing directly  
from the USB flash  
memory drive.  
(MFC-9320CW  
only)  
Legal  
Executive  
A5  
A5 L  
A6  
B5  
B6  
Folio  
202  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
5.USB Direct  
I/F  
1.Direct Print  
2.Media Type Thin  
Sets the media type  
when printing directly  
from the USB flash  
memory drive.  
99  
(Continued)  
Plain*  
Thick  
(MFC-9320CW  
only)  
Thicker  
(Continued)  
Recycled Paper  
3.Multiple Page 1in1*  
Sets the page style  
when printing multiple  
pages directly from  
the USB Flash  
100  
2in1  
4in1  
9in1  
16in1  
25in1  
memory drive.  
D
1 in 2x2 pages  
1 in 3x3 pages  
1 in 4x4 pages  
1 in 5x5 pages  
4.Orientation Portrait*  
Sets the page  
100  
100  
orientation when  
printing directly from  
the USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Landscape  
5.Collate  
On*  
Enables or disables  
the page collation  
when printing directly  
from the USB Flash  
memory drive.  
Off  
6.Print Quality Normal*  
Sets the print quality  
option when printing  
directly from the USB  
Flash memory drive.  
100  
100  
Fine  
7.PDF Option Document*  
Sets the PDF option  
whether to print  
comments (Markup)  
Document&Markup  
Document&Stamps or stamps in the PDF  
file along with the text.  
8.Index Print Simple*  
Details  
Sets the index print  
option, simple format  
or details.  
100  
203  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
5.USB Direct  
I/F  
2.Scan to USB  
1.Resolution Color 100 dpi*  
Sets the resolution to  
send the scanned  
data to USB Flash  
memory drive.  
See  
Software  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
User  
’s  
(MFC-9320CW  
only)  
Guide on  
the  
(Continued)  
CD-ROM.  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
2.File Name  
—
Enter the file name of  
the scanned data.  
3.PictBridge  
1.Paper Size Letter  
Sets the paper size  
when printing data  
from a camera with  
using PictBridge.  
94  
A4*  
B5  
A5  
B6  
A6  
2.Orientation Letter  
Sets the page  
orientation when  
printing data from a  
camera using  
PictBridge, If you  
choose the paper size  
Letter, A4, or B5,  
Portrait will be chosen.  
If you choose A5, B6  
or A6, Landscape will  
be chosen.  
A4  
B5  
A5  
B6  
A6  
Then, you will  
choose  
Portrait  
Landscape  
3.Date & Time On  
Prints the date and  
time the photo is being  
taken on the photo.  
Off*  
4.File Name  
On  
Prints the file name of  
the data on the photo.  
Off*  
5.Print Quality Normal*  
Sets the print quality  
option when printing  
data from a camera  
using PictBridge.  
Fine  
204  
Menu and features  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
6.Print Reports 1.XMIT Verify  
(MFC-9320CW)  
1.View on LCD  
2.Print Report  
—
—
Prints a Transmission  
Verification Report for  
your last transmission.  
83  
2.Help List  
—
—
Prints the Help List so  
you can see  
83  
at-a-glance how to  
quickly program your  
machine.  
3.Tel Index List 1.Numeric  
—
—
Lists names and  
numbers stored in the  
One Touch and  
Speed Dial memory,  
in numerical or  
83  
83  
2.Alphabetic  
D
alphabetical order.  
4.Fax Journal  
—
—
Lists information  
about your last 200  
incoming and  
outgoing faxes.  
(TX means Transmit.  
RX means Receive.)  
5.User Settings  
6.Network Config  
—
—
—
—
Lists your settings.  
83  
83  
Lists your Network  
settings.  
7.Order Form  
—
—
You can print an  
accessories order  
form to fill out and  
send to your Brother  
dealer.  
83  
205  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
5.Network 1.TCP/IP  
1.Boot Method  
Auto*  
Static  
RARP  
Chooses the BOOT  
method that best  
suits your needs.  
See  
Network  
(MFC-9120CN)  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
CD-ROM.  
2.IP Address  
3.Subnet Mask  
4.Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the IP address.  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Subnet  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
mask.  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
address.  
5.Node Name  
6.WINS Config  
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Enter the Node  
name.  
Auto*  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration mode.  
Static  
Primary  
7.WINS Server  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
WINS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
Secondary  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
8.DNS Server  
Primary  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
DNS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
Secondary  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
9.APIPA  
0.IPv6  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-local address  
range.  
Off  
On  
Enable or Disable the  
IPv6 protocol. If you  
want to use the IPv6  
protocol, visit  
Off*  
http://solutions.  
brother. com/ for  
more information.  
2.Ethernet  
—
Auto*  
Chooses the  
Ethernet link mode.  
100B-FD  
100B-HD  
10B-FD  
10B-HD  
206  
Menu and features  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
5.Network 3.Scan To  
—
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
Chooses the file  
format to send the  
scanned data via  
FTP.  
See  
Network  
FTP  
(MFC-  
9120CN)  
User’s  
(Continued)  
Guide on  
the  
CD-ROM.  
D
B&W 200x100 dpi  
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
4.ScanTo  
Network  
—
You can scan a black  
and white or colour  
document directly to  
a CIFS server on  
your local network or  
on the internet.  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
UTCXXX:XX  
5.Time Zone  
—
Sets the time zone  
for your country.  
0.Network 1.Reset  
Reset  
1.Yes  
2.No  
Restore all network  
settings to factory  
default.  
2.Exit  
—
207  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 1.Wired LAN 1.TCP/IP  
1.Boot Method  
Auto*  
Static  
RARP  
Chooses the BOOT  
method that best  
suits your needs.  
See  
Network  
(MFC-9320CW)  
User’s  
Guide on  
the  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
CD-ROM.  
2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the IP address.  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
3.Subnet Mask  
4.Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Subnet  
[000-255]. [000-255] mask.  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
address.  
5.Node Name  
6.WINS Config  
BRNXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Enter the Node  
name.  
Auto*  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration mode.  
Static  
Primary  
7.WINS Server  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
WINS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
Secondary  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
8.DNS Server Primary  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
DNS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
Secondary  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
9.APIPA  
0.IPv6  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-local address  
range.  
Off  
On  
Enable or Disable the  
IPv6 protocol. If you  
want to use the IPv6  
protocol, visit  
Off*  
http://solutions.  
brother.com/ for  
more information.  
208  
Menu and features  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 1.Wired LAN 2.Ethernet  
—
—
Auto*  
Chooses the  
Ethernet link mode.  
See  
Network  
(MFC-9320CW)  
(Continued)  
100B-FD  
100B-HD  
10B-FD  
10B-HD  
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
User’s  
(Continued)  
Guide on  
the  
CD-ROM.  
3.Set to  
Default  
Restore the wired  
network setting to  
factory default.  
D
4.Wired Enable  
—
On*  
Enable orDisablethe  
Wired LAN manually.  
Off  
2.WLAN  
1.TCP/IP  
1.Boot Method  
Auto*  
Static  
RARP  
BOOTP  
DHCP  
Chooses the BOOT  
method that best  
suits your needs.  
2.IP Address [000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the IP address.  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
3.Subnet Mask  
4.Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Subnet  
[000-255]. [000-255] mask.  
[000-255]. [000-255]. Enter the Gateway  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
address.  
5.Node Name  
6.WINS Config  
BRWXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Enter the Node  
name.  
Auto*  
Chooses the WINS  
configuration mode.  
Static  
Primary  
7.WINS Server  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
WINS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
Secondary  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
8.DNS Server Primary  
Specifies the IP  
address of the  
primary or secondary  
DNS server.  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
Secondary  
[000-255]. [000-255].  
[000-255]. [000-255]  
9.APIPA  
On*  
Automatically  
allocates the IP  
address from the  
link-local address  
range.  
Off  
209  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 2.WLAN  
1.TCP/IP  
0.IPv6  
On  
Enable or Disable the  
IPv6 protocol. If you  
want to use the IPv6  
protocol, visit  
See  
Network  
(MFC-9320CW)  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
Off*  
User’s  
(Continued)  
Guide on  
the  
http://solutions.  
brother.com/ for  
more information.  
CD-ROM.  
2.Setup Wizard 1.On  
—
—
You can configure  
your print server.  
2.Off  
3.SES/WPS/AOSS 1.On  
You can easily  
configure your  
wireless network  
settings using the  
one-button push  
method.  
2.Off  
4.WPS w/PIN 1.On  
—
You can easily  
Code  
configure your  
2.Off  
wireless network  
settings using WPS  
with a PIN code.  
5.WLAN Status 1.Status  
Active(11b)  
Active(11g)  
Wired LAN Active  
WLAN OFF  
AOSS Active  
Connection Fail  
Strong  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network status.  
2.Signal  
3.SSID  
You can see the  
current wireless  
network signal  
strength.  
Medium  
Weak  
None  
—
You can see the  
current SSID.  
4.Comm. Mode Ad-hoc  
You can see the  
current  
Communication  
Mode.  
Infrastructure  
6.Set to  
Default  
—
—
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
Restore the wireless  
network settings to  
factory default.  
7.WLAN Enable  
On  
Enable or disable the  
wireless LAN  
manually.  
Off*  
210  
Menu and features  
Main  
Submenu  
Menu Selections  
Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
Menu  
7.Network 3.Scan To  
—
—
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
Chooses the file  
format to send the  
scanned data via  
FTP.  
See  
Network  
FTP  
(MFC-9320CW)  
User’s  
(Continued)  
Guide on  
the  
CD-ROM.  
D
B&W 200x100 dpi  
Color 100 dpi*  
Color 200 dpi  
Color 300 dpi  
Color 600 dpi  
Gray 100 dpi  
Gray 200 dpi  
Gray 300 dpi  
B&W 200 dpi  
4.ScanTo  
Network  
—
—
You can scan a black  
and white or colour  
document directly to  
a CIFS server on  
your local network or  
on the internet.  
B&W 200x100 dpi  
UTCXXX:XX  
5.Time Zone  
—
—
—
Sets the time zone  
for your country.  
0.Network 1.Reset  
Reset  
1.Yes  
Restores all network  
settings to factory  
default.  
2.No  
2.Exit  
—
—
211  
Main Menu  
Submenu  
Menu Selections Options  
Descriptions  
Page  
8.Machine Info.  
1.Serial No.  
—
—
You can check the  
serial number of your  
machine.  
187  
(MFC-9320CW)  
6.Machine Info.  
2.Page Counter  
3.Parts Life  
—
Total  
You can check the  
number of total  
pages the machine  
has printed during its  
life.  
187  
187  
(MFC-9120CN)  
Fax/List  
Copy  
Print  
1.Drum  
1.Black(K)  
2.Cyan(C)  
You can check the  
percentage of a  
machine part’s life  
that remains  
3.Magenta(M)  
available.  
4.Yellow(Y)  
2.Belt Unit  
3.PF Kit  
4.Fuser  
—
—
—
—
0.Initial Setup 1.Receive Mode  
Fax Only*  
Fax/Tel  
Chooses the receive  
mode that best suits  
your needs.  
46  
External TAD  
Manual  
—
2.Date&Time  
3.Station ID  
4.Tone/Pulse  
—
—
Puts the date and  
time on the LCD and  
in headings of faxes  
you send.  
See  
Quick  
Setup  
Guide.  
Fax:  
Tel:  
Sets your name and  
fax number to appear  
on each page you  
fax.  
Name:  
—
—
Tone*  
Chooses the dialling  
mode.  
71  
(not available in  
New Zealand)  
Pulse  
4.Dial Tone  
Detection  
You can shorten the  
dial tone detect  
pause.  
141  
(for New Zealand)  
5.Dial Tone  
No Detection*  
5.Dial Prefix  
(for New Zealand)  
6.Dial Prefix  
—
—
Sets a prefix number  
that will always be  
added before the fax  
number every time  
you dial.  
27  
6.Reset  
1.Network  
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
Restores all network  
settings to factory  
default.  
187  
(for New Zealand)  
7.Reset  
2.Address & Fax 1.Reset  
Restores all stored  
phone numbers and  
fax settings.  
2.Exit  
3.All Settings  
1.Reset  
2.Exit  
Restores all the  
machine settings to  
factory default.  
212  
Menu and features  
Entering text  
D
When setting certain menu selections, such as the Station ID, you will need to type text  
characters. The dial pad keys have letters printed on them. The keys: 0, # and l do not have  
printed letters because they are used for special characters.  
Press the appropriate dial pad key the number of times shown in this reference table to access  
the character you want.  
Press  
Key  
one  
time  
two  
times  
three  
times  
four  
times  
five  
times  
six  
times  
seven  
times  
eight  
times  
nine  
times  
D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
@
a
d
g
j
.
/
c
f
1
A
D
G
J
@
B
.
/
1
a
d
g
j
@
b
e
h
k
b
e
h
k
n
q
u
x
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
6
R
8
Y
E
i
H
K
l
L
m
p
t
o
r
M
s
N
P
O
Q
V
X
m
S
t
n
7
u
9
v
y
T
z
U
W
w
Z
For menu selections that do not allow lower case character selection, please use this reference  
table.  
Press Key  
one time  
two times three times four times  
five times  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
D
G
J
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
C
F
I
2
3
4
5
6
S
8
Z
A
D
G
J
L
M
P
T
O
R
V
Y
M
7
T
9
W
Inserting spaces  
To enter a space in a fax number, press c once between numbers. To enter a space in a name,  
press c twice between characters.  
Making corrections  
If you entered a letter incorrectly and want to change it, press d to move the cursor to the incorrect  
character, and then press Clear/Back.  
Repeating letters  
To enter a character on the same key as the previous character, press c to move the cursor right  
before pressing the key again.  
213  
 
Special characters and symbols  
Press l, # or 0, then press d or c to move the cursor to the symbol or character you want. Press  
OK to choose it. The symbols and characters below will appear depending on your menu  
selection.  
Press l  
Press #  
Press 0  
for  
for  
for  
(space) ! " # $ % & ’ ( ) l + , - . / m  
: ; < = > ? @ [ ] ^ _ \ ~ ` | { }  
Ä Ë Ö Ü À Ç È É 0  
214  
Specifications  
E
E
General  
E
Printer Type  
LED  
Print Method  
Electrophotographic LED  
64 MB  
Memory Capacity  
LCD (liquid crystal display) 16 characters × 2 lines  
Power Source  
220 - 240 V AC 50/60Hz  
Peak:  
Power Consumption  
1176 W  
E
Average 480 W 1  
Copying:  
Sleep:  
(MFC-9120CN) Average 11 W  
(MFC-9320CW) Average 12 W  
Average 75 W  
Standby:  
Dimensions  
401 mm  
428 mm  
491 mm  
Weight  
WithoutDrum/Toner Unit: 20.1 kg  
Sound power  
Noise level  
Operating (Printing):  
Standby:  
LWAd = 6.5 Bell (A)  
LWAd = 4.8 Bell (A)  
Sound pressure  
Operating (Printing):  
Standby:  
LPAm = 53 dBA  
LPAm = 30 dBA  
1
When making a copy from one sheet  
215  
     
Temperature  
Humidity  
Operating:  
Storage:  
10 to 32.5 °C  
0 to 40 °C  
Operating:  
Storage:  
20 to 80% (without condensation)  
10 to 90% (without condensation)  
ADF (automatic document Up to 35 pages (Staggered) [80 gsm]  
feeder)  
Recommended Environment for Best Results:  
Temperature: 20 to 30 °C  
Humidity:  
50% - 70%  
Paper Tray  
250 Sheets [80 gsm]  
216  
Specifications  
Print media  
E
Paper Input  
Paper Tray  
„ Paper Type:  
„ Paper Size:  
Thin paper, Plain paper or Recycled paper  
Letter, A4, B5 (ISO), A5, A5 (Long Edge),  
B6 (ISO), A6, Executive, Legal and Folio  
„ Paper Weight:  
60 to 105 gsm  
„ Maximum Paper Tray Capacity: Up to 250 sheets of 80 gsm Plain Paper  
Manual Feed Slot  
E
„ Paper Type:  
Thin paper, Plain Paper, Thick paper,  
Thicker Paper, Bond paper, Recycled  
Paper, Envelopes or Labels 1  
Width: 76.2 to 220 mm 2  
„ Paper Size:  
Length:116 to 406.4 mm 2  
60 to 163 gsm  
„ Paper Weight:  
Paper Output Up to 100 sheets (face down print delivery to the output paper tray)  
1
2
For labels, we recommend removing printed pages from the output paper tray immediately after they exit the machine  
to avoid the possibility of smudging.  
When using paper that is smaller than 105 × 148 mm (or A6 size) open the back cover (back output tray).  
217  
       
Fax  
E
Compatibility  
Coding System  
Modem Speed  
Document Size  
ITU-T Super Group 3  
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG  
Automatic Fallback:  
ADF Width:  
33,600 bps  
147.3 to 215.9 mm  
147.3 to 356.0 mm  
ADF Length:  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 215.9 mm  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 297 mm  
Max. 208 mm  
Scanning Width  
Printing Width  
Max. 208 mm  
Greyscale  
8 bit/256 levels  
Polling Receive Type  
Polling Transmit Type  
Contrast Control  
Resolution  
Standard, Secure, Timer, Sequential  
Standard, Secure  
Automatic/Light/Dark (manual setting)  
Horizontal:  
Vertical  
8 dot/mm  
„ Standard:  
„ Fine:  
3.85 line/mm  
7.7 line/mm  
7.7 line/mm  
15.4 line/mm  
„ Photo:  
„ Superfine:  
8 (4 × 2)  
One Touch Dial  
Speed Dial  
Groups  
200 stations  
Up to 20  
Broadcasting 3  
Automatic Redial  
Ring Delay  
258 stations  
3 times at 5 minute intervals  
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 rings (for Australia)  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 rings (for New Zealand)  
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 rings (for some countries)  
Public switched telephone network  
Communication Source  
Memory Transmission  
Up to 600 1/500 2 pages 3  
Up to 600 1/500 2 pages 3  
Out of Paper Reception  
1
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘Brother Standard Chart No. 1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code).  
Specifications and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
2
3
‘Pages’ refers to the ‘ITU-T Test Chart #1’ (a typical business letter, Standard resolution, JBIG code). Specifications  
and printed materials are subject to change without prior notice.  
Black & White only  
218  
       
Specifications  
Copy  
E
Colour/Monochrome  
Document Size  
Yes/Yes  
ADF Width:  
ADF Length:  
148 to 215.9 mm  
148 to 355.6 mm  
Scanner Glass Width: Max. 215.9 mm  
Scanner Glass Length: Max. 297 mm  
Max. 208 mm  
Copy Width  
Multiple Copies  
Reduce/Enlarge  
Resolution  
Stacks or Sorts up to 99 pages  
25% to 400% (in increments of 1%)  
Up to 600 × 600 dpi  
E
First Copy Out Time  
(Monochrome)  
Less than 19 seconds (from READY mode)  
First Copy Out Time (Colour) Less than 24 seconds (from READY mode)  
219  
   
Scan  
E
Colour/Monochrome  
TWAIN Compliant  
Yes/Yes  
Yes (Windows® 2000 Professional/Windows® XP/  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/Windows Vista®)  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 1  
Yes (Windows® XP/Windows Vista®)  
24 bit colour  
WIA Compliant  
Colour Depth  
Resolution  
Up to 19200 × 19200 dpi (interpolated) 2  
Up to 1200 × 2400 dpi (optical) 2 (From Scanner Glass)  
Up to 1200 × 600 dpi (optical) 2 (From ADF)  
Document Size  
ADF Width:  
148.0 to 215.9 mm  
148.0 to 355.6 mm  
Max. 215.9 mm  
Max. 297 mm  
ADF Length:  
Scanner Glass Width:  
Scanner Glass Length:  
Max. 210 mm  
Scanning Width  
Greyscale  
256 levels  
1
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.  
2
Maximum 1200 × 1200 dpi scanning with the WIA driver in Windows® XP/Windows Vista® (resolution up to  
19200 × 19200 dpi can be chosen by using the scanner utility)  
220  
           
Specifications  
Print  
E
PCL6, BR-Script3 (PostScript®3™)  
Emulations  
Host-Based Driver for Windows® 2000 Professional/  
Printer Driver  
Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/  
Windows Vista®/Windows Server® 2003 1/  
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 1/Windows Server® 2008 1  
BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Windows® 2000 Professional/  
Windows® XP/Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition/  
Windows Vista®/Windows Server® 2003 1/Windows Server® 2008 1  
E
Macintosh Printer Driver for Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 2  
BR-Script3 (PPD file) for Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 2  
Resolution  
600 dpi × 600 dpi, 2400 dpi (600 × 2400)  
Up to 16 pages/minute (A4 size) 3  
Print Speed  
(Monochrome)  
Up to 16 pages/minute (A4 size) 3  
Print Speed (Colour)  
First Print Out Time  
(Monochrome)  
Less than 15 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)  
First Print Out Time  
(Colour)  
Less than 16 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)  
Less than 19 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)  
Less than 24 seconds (from the READY mode and standard tray)  
First Copy Out Time  
(Monochrome)  
First Copy Out Time  
(Colour)  
1
Print only via network.  
2
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.  
The print speed may change depending on the type of document you print.  
3
221  
       
Interfaces  
USB  
E
Use a USB 2.0 interface cable that is no longer than 2.0 m. 1 2  
Use an Ethernet UTP cable category 5 or greater.  
LAN 3  
Wireless LAN  
(MFC-9320CW)  
Your machine supports IEEE 802.11b/g wireless communication with  
your wireless LAN using Infrastructure mode or a wireless  
Peer-to-Peer connection in Ad-hoc mode.  
1
Your machine has a Hi-Speed USB 2.0 interface. The machine can also be connected to a computer that has a  
USB 1.1 interface.  
2
3
Third party USB ports are not supported.  
See Ethernet wired network on page 227 and the Network User's Guide on the CD-ROM for detailed network  
specifications.  
222  
       
Specifications  
PictBridge (MFC-9320CW)  
E
Compatibility  
Supports the Camera & Imaging Products Association PictBridge  
standard CIPA-001. Visit http://www.cipa.jp/pictbridge/ for more  
information.  
Interface  
USB direct interface.  
E
223  
 
Direct Print feature (MFC-9320CW)  
E
PDF version 1.7 1, JPEG, Exif + JPEG, PRN (created by Brother  
Compatibility  
printer driver), TIFF (scanned by all Brother MFC or DCP models),  
PostScript®3™ (created by Brother BR-Script 3 printer driver), XPS  
version 1.0.  
1
PDF data that includes a JBIG2 image file, a JPEG2000 image file or a transparency file is not supported.  
224  
   
Specifications  
Computer requirements  
E
Minimum System Requirements and Supported PC Software Functions  
Computer Platform & Processor  
Minimum Recommended Hard Disk Space Supported Supported  
Operating System  
Version  
Minimum Speed RAM  
RAM  
to install  
For  
Drivers Applications  
PC  
Software  
Functions  
PC  
3
For  
Interface  
Intel® Pentium® II  
or equivalent  
®
®
64 MB  
256 MB 150 MB 310 MB Printing,  
USB,  
Windows  
Windows  
4
PC Fax ,  
Scanning  
Operating 2000  
System 1  
10/100  
Base Tx  
5
Professional  
(Ethernet),  
®
128 MB  
Windows XP  
Home 2 5  
Wireless  
802.11 b/g  
6
®
Windows XP  
Professional 2 5  
E
64-bit(Intel®64or  
AMD64)  
supported CPU  
®
256 MB 512 MB  
512 MB 1 GB  
Windows XP  
Professional  
2
x64 Edition  
®
®
Windows  
500 MB 500 MB  
Intel Pentium 4 or  
equivalent 64 bit  
®
2
Vista  
-
®
(Intel 64 or AMD64)  
supported CPU  
®
®
Windows  
Server  
2003 (print  
only via  
network)  
256 MB 512 MB 50 MB  
N/A  
Printing 10/100  
Base Tx  
Intel Pentium III  
or equivalent  
®
(Ethernet),  
Wireless  
802.11 b/g  
6
64-bit(Intel®64or  
AMD64)  
supported CPU  
Windows  
®
Server  
2003 x64  
Edition  
(print only  
via network)  
Windows  
Server 2008  
(print only via  
network)  
®
®
512 MB 2 GB  
Intel Pentium 4 or  
equivalent 64 bit  
®
-
®
(Intel 64 or AMD64)  
supported CPU  
PowerPC G4/G5,  
PowerPC G3  
350MHz  
Macintosh  
Operating  
System  
Mac OS X  
10.3.9 -  
10.4.3  
128 MB 256 MB 80 MB  
400 MB Printing,  
PC Fax  
USB,  
10/100  
Base Tx  
(Ethernet),  
4
Send ,  
Scanning  
Mac OS X  
10.4.4 or  
greater  
PowerPC G4/G5, 512 MB 1 GB  
®
Intel Core  
Processor  
™
Wireless  
802.11 b/g  
7
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Internet Explorer® 5.5 or greater.  
For WIA, 1200 x 1200 resolution. Brother Scanner Utility enables to enhance up to 19200 x 19200 dpi.  
Third party USB ports are not supported.  
PC Fax supports black and white only.  
PaperPort™ 11SE supports Microsoft® SP4 or higher for Windows® 2000 and SP2 or higher for XP.  
MFC-9320CW only  
7
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.  
225  
               
Consumable items  
E
Approx. 1,000 pages (A4) 1  
Toner Cartridge Life  
Starter Toner Cartridge:  
Standard Toner Cartridge:  
TN-240BK (Black):  
Approx. 2,200 pages (A4) 1  
Approx. 1,400 pages (A4) 1  
Approx. 1,400 pages (A4) 1  
Approx. 1,400 pages (A4) 1  
Approx. 15,000 pages (A4) 5  
TN-240C (Cyan):  
TN-240M (Magenta):  
TN-240Y (Yellow):  
DR-240CL 2  
Drum Unit  
DR-240CL-BK 3  
DR-240CL-CMY 4  
BU-200CL  
Belt Unit  
Approx. 50,000 pages (A4)  
Approx. 50,000 pages  
Waste Toner Box  
WT-200CL  
1
2
3
4
5
Approx. cartridge yield is declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.  
Contains 4pc. Drum Set  
Contains 1pc. Black Drum Unit  
Contains 1pc. Colour Drum Unit  
Drum yield is approximate, and may vary by type of use.  
Note  
• Brother does not recommend the use of consumables other than genuine Brother  
consumables.  
• Your machine warranty may not cover any damage arising from the use of non genuine Brother  
consumables.  
226  
           
Specifications  
Ethernet wired network  
E
Network board  
model name  
NC-6700h  
LAN  
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,  
Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup. 1 2  
Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP, Windows® XP  
Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2003 2,  
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition 2, Windows Server® 2008 2  
Support for  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 3 4  
E
Protocols  
IPv4:  
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),  
WINS/NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMP, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP  
IPv6:  
(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP-AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMPv6, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP  
Network type  
Ethernet 10/100 BASE-TX Auto Negotiation (Wired LAN)  
227  
   
BRAdmin Light for Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP,  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows  
Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition,  
Management  
utilities 5  
Windows Server® 2008 and Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 4  
BRAdmin Professional for Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows®  
XP, Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®,  
Windows Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition and  
Windows Server® 2008  
Web BRAdmin for Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP,  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows  
Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition and Windows  
Server® 2008  
Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.  
1
2
3
4
5
PC Fax Send for Mac  
Print only via network.  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater (mDNS)  
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.  
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.  
228  
         
Specifications  
Ethernet wireless network (MFC-9320CW only)  
E
Network board  
model name  
NC-7500W  
LAN  
You can connect your machine to a network for Network Printing,  
Network Scanning, PC Fax and Remote Setup 1 2  
.
Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP, Windows® XP  
Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows Server® 2003,  
Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition, Windows Server® 2008 and  
Windows Server® 2008 x64 Edition 2  
Support for  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 3 4  
E
Protocols  
IPv4:  
ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, APIPA (Auto IP),  
WINS, NetBIOS name resolution, DNS Resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS Server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMP, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP  
IPv6:  
(Turned off as default) NDP, RA, DNS resolver,  
mDNS, LLMNR responder, LPR/LPD,  
Custom Raw Port/Port9100, IPP/IPPS,  
FTP Client and Server, TELNET Server,  
HTTP/HTTPS server, SSL/TLS,  
TFTP Client and Server, SMTP Client, APOP,  
POP before SMTP, SMTP AUTH, SNMPv1/v2c/v3,  
ICMPv6, LLTD responder,  
Web Services Print, CIFS Client, SNTP  
Network type  
IEEE 802.11 b/g (Wireless LAN)  
229  
 
BRAdmin Light for Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP,  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows  
Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition,  
Management  
utilities 5  
Windows Server® 2008 and Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater 4  
BRAdmin Professional for Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows®  
XP, Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows  
Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition and Windows  
Server® 2008  
Web BRAdmin for Windows® 2000 Professional, Windows® XP,  
Windows® XP Professional x64 Edition, Windows Vista®, Windows  
Server® 2003, Windows Server® 2003 x64 Edition and Windows  
Server® 2008  
Client computers with a web browser supporting Java.  
1
2
3
4
5
PC Fax Send for Mac  
Only printing for Windows Server® 2003 and Windows Server® 2008  
Mac OS X 10.3.9 or greater (mDNS)  
For the latest driver updates for the Mac OS X you are using, visit us at http://solutions.brother.com/.  
BRAdmin Professional and Web BRAdmin are available as a download from http://solutions.brother.com/.  
230  
         
Specifications  
Authentication and encryption for wireless users only  
E
Authentication method  
E
The Brother machine supports the following methods:  
„ Open system  
Wireless devices are allowed to access the network without any authentication.  
„ Shared key  
A secret pre-determined key is shared by all devices that will access the wireless network. The  
Brother machine uses the WEP keys as the pre-determined key.  
„ WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK  
E
Enables a Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK), which enables  
the Brother wireless machine to associate with access points using TKIP for WPA-PSK or AES  
for WPA-PSK and WPA2-PSK (WPA-Personal).  
„ LEAP  
Cisco LEAP (Light Extensible Authentication Protocol) has been developed by Cisco Systems,  
Inc. and enables the Brother wireless product to associate with access points using CKIP  
encryptions.  
„ EAP-FAST  
EAP-FAST (Extensible Authentication Protocol - Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunnel)  
has been developed by Cisco Systems, Inc. which uses user ID and password for  
authentication, and symmetric key algorithms to achieve a tunneled authentication process.  
The Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:  
• EAP-FAST/NONE  
MS-CHAPv2 is used for Provisioning, and the method of EAP-FAST corresponding to  
second phase authentication method.  
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2  
Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses MS-CHAPv2 for inner method.  
• EAP-FAST/GTC  
Method of EAP-FAST corresponding to CCXv4 that uses GTC for inner method.  
231  
   
Encryption methods  
E
Encryption is used to secure the data that is sent over the wireless network. The Brother machine  
supports the following encryption methods:  
„ WEP  
By using WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy), the data is transmitted and received with a secure  
key.  
„ TKIP  
TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) provides per-packet key mixing a message integrity  
check and re-keying mechanism.  
„ AES  
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) is Wi-Fi® authorized strong encryption standard.  
„ CKIP  
The original Key Integrity Protocol for LEAP by Cisco Systems, Inc.  
Network key  
E
There are some rules for each security method:  
„ Open system/Shared key with WEP  
This key is a 64-bit or 128-bit value that must be entered in an ASCII or hexadecimal format.  
• 64 (40) bit ASCII:  
Uses 5 text characters. e.g.“WSLAN” (this is case sensitive).  
• 64 (40) bit hexadecimal:  
Uses 10 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234aba”.  
• 128 (104) bit ASCII:  
Uses 13 text characters. e.g.“Wirelesscomms” (this is case sensitive).  
• 128 (104) bit hexadecimal:  
Uses 26 digits of hexadecimal data. e.g.“71f2234ab56cd709e5412aa2ba”.  
„ WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK and TKIP or AES  
Uses a Pre-Shared Key (PSK) that is 8 or more characters in length, up to a maximum of 63  
characters.  
„ LEAP  
Uses User ID and Password.  
• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.  
• Password: less than 32 characters in length.  
„ EAP-FAST  
Uses User ID and Password.  
• User ID: less than 64 characters in length.  
• Password: less than 32 characters in length.  
232  
Specifications  
Wireless one-push configuration  
E
If your wireless access point supports either SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup (PBC 1)  
or AOSS™, you can configure the machine easily without a computer. By pushing a button on the  
wireless LAN router / access point and using the menu on the machine, you can set up the  
wireless network and security settings. See the User’s Guide for your wireless LAN router / access  
point for instructions on how to access one-push mode.  
1
Push Button Configuration  
Note  
Routers or access points that support SecureEasySetup™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup or AOSS™  
have the symbols shown below.  
E
233  
   
Glossary  
F
F
This is a comprehensive list of features and terms that appear in Brother manuals. Availability of  
these features depends on the model you purchased.  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
Cancel Job  
Cancels a programmed print job and  
clears the machine’s memory.  
CNG tones  
The document can be placed in the ADF  
and scanned one page at a time  
automatically.  
The special tones (beeps) sent by fax  
machines during automatic transmission  
to tell the receiving machine that a fax  
machine is calling.  
Address Book ( )  
A pre-programmed number for easy  
dialling.  
You must press  
(Address Book), then  
Coding method  
enter the three-digit Speed Dial location  
and press Start to begin the dialling  
process.  
Method of coding the information  
contained in the document. All fax  
machines must use a minimum standard  
of Modified Huffman (MH). Your machine  
is capable of greater compression  
methods, Modified Read (MR), Modified  
Modified Read (MMR) and JBIG, if the  
receiving machine has the same  
capability.  
Auto Reduction  
Reduces the size of incoming faxes.  
Automatic fax transmission  
Sending a fax without picking up the  
handset of the external telephone.  
Automatic Redial  
Communication error (or Comm. Error)  
A feature that enables your machine to  
redial the last fax number after five  
minutes if the fax did not go through  
because the line was busy.  
An error during fax sending or receiving,  
usually caused by line noise or static.  
Compatibility group  
The ability of one fax unit to communicate  
with another. Compatibility is assured  
between ITU-T Groups.  
Backup Print  
Your machine prints a copy of every fax  
that is received and stored in memory.  
This is a safety feature so you will not lose  
messages during a power failure.  
Contrast  
Setting to compensate for dark or light  
documents, by making faxes or copies of  
dark documents lighter and light  
documents darker.  
Batch Transmission  
As a cost saving feature, all delayed faxes  
to the same fax number will be sent as one  
transmission.  
Delayed Fax  
Sends your fax at a specified later time  
that day.  
Beeper Volume  
Volume setting for the beep when you  
press a key or make an error.  
Broadcasting  
The ability to send the same fax message  
to more than one location.  
234  
 
Glossary  
Distinctive Ring  
Fax Journal  
Lists information about the last 200  
A subscriber service purchased from the  
telephone company that gives you  
another telephone number on an existing  
telephone line. The Brother machine uses  
the new number to simulate a dedicated  
fax line.  
incoming and outgoing faxes. TX means  
Transmit. RX means Receive.  
Fax Storage  
You can store faxes in the memory.  
Fax tones  
Dual Access  
The signals sent by sending and receiving  
fax machines while communicating  
information.  
Your machine can scan outgoing faxes or  
scheduled jobs into memory at the same  
time it is sending a fax or receiving or  
printing an incoming fax.  
Fax/Tel  
You can receive faxes and telephone  
calls. Do not use this mode if you are  
using a telephone answering device  
(TAD).  
ECM (Error Correction Mode)  
Detects errors during fax transmission  
and resends the pages of the fax that had  
an error.  
F
Fine resolution  
Extension telephone  
Resolution is 203 × 196 dpi. It is used for  
small print and graphs.  
A telephone on the fax number that is  
plugged into a separate wall socket.  
Greyscale  
External phone  
The shades of grey available for copying  
and faxing photographs.  
A TAD (telephone answering device) or  
telephone that is connected to your  
machine.  
Group number  
A combination of One Touch and  
Speed Dial numbers that are stored on a  
One Touch key or in a Speed Dial location  
for Broadcasting.  
F/T Ring Time  
The length of time that the Brother  
machine pseudo/double-rings (when the  
Receive Mode setting is Fax/Tel) to notify  
you to pick up a voice call that it answered.  
Help List  
A printout of the complete Menu table that  
you can use to program your machine  
when you do not have the User’s Guide  
with you.  
FaxAbility (For New Zealand)  
A subscriber service purchased from the  
telephone company that provides another  
telephone number on an existing  
telephone line. The Brother fax machine  
uses the new number to simulate a  
dedicated fax line.  
Journal Period  
The pre-programmed time period  
between automatically printed Fax  
Journal Reports. You can print the Fax  
Journal on demand without interrupting  
the cycle.  
Fax Detect  
Enables your machine to respond to CNG  
tones if you interrupt a fax call by  
answering it.  
LCD (liquid crystal display)  
The display screen on the machine that  
shows interactive messages during  
On-Screen Programming and shows the  
date and time when the machine is idle.  
Fax Forwarding  
Sends a fax received into the memory to  
another pre-programmed fax number.  
235  
Manual fax  
When you lift the handset of your external  
Remaining Jobs  
You can check which programmed fax  
jobs are waiting in the memory and cancel  
the jobs individually.  
telephone so you can hear the receiving  
fax machine answer before you press  
Start to begin transmission.  
Remote Access Code  
Menu mode  
Your own four-digit code (– – –l) that  
allows you to call and access your  
machine from a remote location.  
Programming mode for changing your  
machine’s settings.  
OCR (optical character recognition)  
Remote Activation code  
The bundled ScanSoft™  
Press this code (l 5 1) when you answer  
a fax call on an extension or external  
telephone.  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR or Presto!  
PageManager software application  
converts an image of text to text you can  
edit.  
Remote Retrieval Access  
The ability to access your machine  
remotely from a touch tone telephone.  
One Touch  
Keys on the machine’s control panel  
where you can store numbers for easy  
dialling. You can store a second number  
on each key if you press Shift and the  
One Touch key together.  
Resolution  
The number of vertical and horizontal lines  
per inch.  
Ring Delay  
The number of rings before the machine  
answers in Fax Onlyand Fax/Tel  
modes.  
Out of Paper Reception  
Receives faxes into the machine’s  
memory when the machine is out of paper.  
Ring Volume  
Overseas Mode  
Volume setting for the machine’s ring.  
Makes temporary changes to the fax  
tones to accommodate noise and static on  
overseas telephone lines.  
Scanning  
The process of sending an electronic  
image of a paper document into your  
computer.  
Pause  
Allows you to place a 3.5 second delay in  
the dialling sequence while you are  
dialling using the dial pad or while you are  
storing One Touch and Speed Dial  
numbers. Press Redial/Pause as many  
times as needed for longer pauses.  
Search  
An electronic, alphabetical listing of stored  
One Touch, Speed Dial and Group  
numbers.  
Station ID  
Polling  
The stored information that appears on  
the top of faxed pages. It includes the  
sender’s name and fax number.  
The process of a fax machine calling  
another fax machine to retrieve waiting fax  
messages.  
TAD (telephone answering device)  
Pulse  
You can connect an external TAD to your  
machine.  
A form of rotary dialling on a telephone  
line.  
Tel Index List  
Real Time Transmission  
A listing of names and numbers stored in  
One Touch and Speed Dial memory, in  
numerical order.  
When memory is full, you can send faxes  
in real time.  
236  
Glossary  
Temporary settings  
You can choose certain options for each  
fax transmission and copy without  
changing the default settings.  
Tone (not available in New Zealand)  
A form of dialling on the telephone line  
used for Touch Tone telephones.  
Transmission  
The process of sending faxes over the  
telephone lines from your machine to the  
receiving fax machine.  
User Settings List  
A printed report that shows the current  
settings of the machine.  
Xmit Report (Transmission Verification  
Report)  
F
A listing for each transmission, that shows  
its date, time and number.  
237  
Index  
G
ControlCenter3 (for Windows®)  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
A
CD-ROM.  
Copy  
Address book ...................................... 8, 63  
ADF (automatic document feeder)  
faxing ....................................................38  
using .....................................................22  
Answering machine (TAD)  
contrast ...........................................86, 89  
Enlarge/Reduce key ............................. 87  
enter copy mode ................................... 86  
keys ..................................................8, 87  
multiple ................................................. 86  
N in 1 (page layout) .............................. 90  
Options Key .......................................... 88  
out of memory ...................................... 92  
quality ................................................... 89  
single .................................................... 86  
sort (ADF only) ..................................... 89  
temporary settings ................................ 87  
using ADF ............................................. 89  
using scanner glass .............................. 91  
Cordless telephone (non-Brother) ........... 61  
Corona wires ......................................... 158  
Cover page .............................................. 41  
custom comments ................................ 41  
for all faxes ........................................... 42  
for next fax only .................................... 41  
printed form .......................................... 42  
connecting .............................................59  
Apple Macintosh  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Automatic  
fax receive .............................................47  
Fax Detect ..........................................49  
fax redial ...............................................64  
B
Belt unit  
replacing .............................................177  
Broadcasting ............................................39  
cancelling ..............................................40  
setting up groups for .............................69  
C
Cancelling  
D
broadcast in process .............................40  
fax jobs in memory ................................45  
fax storage ............................................73  
jobs awaiting redial ...............................45  
remote fax options ................................75  
Cleaning  
Daylight saving time ................................ 26  
Delayed batch transmission .................... 44  
Dialing  
dial prefix .............................................. 27  
Dialling  
a pause ................................................. 64  
automatic fax redial .............................. 64  
groups (broadcasting) .......................... 39  
manual .................................................. 63  
one touch .............................................. 63  
restricting dialling .................................. 35  
speed dial ............................................. 63  
using the Search key ............................ 63  
Direct print ............................................... 99  
Direct key ........................................... 100  
specification ........................................ 224  
Document  
corona wires ........................................158  
drum unit .............................................159  
LED head ............................................157  
scanner ...............................................156  
Connecting  
external TAD (answering machine) .......58  
external telephone ................................60  
Consumable items ........................ 166, 167  
Control panel overview ..............................6  
ControlCenter2 (for Macintosh)  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
how to load .....................................22, 23  
jam ...................................................... 149  
238  
 
Drum unit  
sending ................................................. 38  
broadcasting ...................................... 39  
cancelling from memory .................... 45  
contrast ............................................. 42  
delayed batch .................................... 44  
delayed fax ........................................ 44  
from ADF ........................................... 38  
from memory (dual access) ............... 43  
from scanner glass ............................ 38  
manual .............................................. 45  
overseas ............................................ 44  
polled transmit ................................... 80  
real time transmission ....................... 43  
resolution ........................................... 42  
telephone line interference .............. 141  
Fax/Tel mode  
answering at extension telephones ...... 61  
F/T ring time (double-ring) .................... 48  
Fax Detect ............................................ 49  
receiving faxes ..................................... 60  
remote activation code ......................... 61  
remote deactivation code ..................... 61  
ring delay .............................................. 48  
Folio ...................................................18, 24  
checking (remaining life) .....................187  
cleaning ..................................... 158, 159  
Dual access .............................................43  
E
EAP-FAST .............................................231  
Enlarge/Reduce key .................................87  
Envelopes .............................13, 18, 19, 20  
Labels ...................................................13  
Equalization ...........................................141  
Error messages on LCD ........................142  
Comm. Error .......................................143  
Init Unable XX .....................................144  
No Paper .............................................145  
Out of Memory ....................................145  
Print Unable XX ..................................146  
Scan Unable XX .................................147  
Extension telephone, using ......................61  
External telephone, connecting ................60  
G
F
Fax codes  
changing ........................................ 62, 75  
remote access code ..............................75  
remote activation code ..........................61  
remote deactivation code ......................61  
Fax forwarding  
G
Greyscale ...................................... 218, 220  
Groups for broadcasting .......................... 69  
changing remotely ......................... 77, 78  
programming a number ........................72  
Fax storage ..............................................73  
printing from memory ............................51  
turning off ..............................................75  
turning on ..............................................73  
Fax, stand-alone  
H
HELP ....................................................... 84  
Help List ............................................... 84  
LCD messages ................................... 193  
Menu Table ................................193, 195  
using menu keys ................................ 193  
Hook key .......................................8, 60, 61  
receiving  
Fax Detect .........................................49  
fax forwarding ....................................78  
fax receive stamp ...............................50  
from extension telephone ........... 60, 61  
into memory (fax storage) ..................73  
polling receive ....................................79  
reducing to fit on paper ......................50  
retrieving from a remote site ....... 76, 78  
ring delay, setting ...............................48  
sequential polling ...............................80  
telephone line interference ..............141  
J
Jacks  
EXT  
external telephone ............................. 60  
TAD (answering machine) ................. 58  
Jams  
document ........................................... 149  
paper .................................................. 150  
239  
L
N
Labels .................................. 12, 13, 18, 21  
LCD (liquid crystal display) ............... 8, 193  
contrast .................................................27  
Help List ................................................83  
Loading paper in the manual feed slot .....12  
N in 1 (page layout) ................................. 90  
Network  
faxing  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
printing  
See Network User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
M
Machine information  
scanning  
checking remaining life of parts ..........187  
page counts ........................................187  
status LED ............................................10  
Macintosh  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
O
One touch  
Maintenance, routine .............................155  
checking the remaining life of parts ....187  
replacing  
belt unit ............................................177  
drum units ........................................173  
toner cartridge ..................................168  
waste toner box ................................181  
Manual  
changing ............................................... 68  
setting up .............................................. 65  
using ..................................................... 63  
Out of Memory  
message .....................45, 92, 98, 103, 145  
P
Packing and shipping the machine ........ 188  
Page layout (N in 1) ................................. 90  
Paper ...............................................17, 217  
how to load ........................................... 11  
in manual feed slot ............................ 12  
in paper tray ...................................... 11  
jam ...................................................... 150  
recommended ...................................... 18  
size .................................................17, 24  
size of document ........................219, 220  
tray capacity ......................................... 18  
type .................................................17, 24  
PaperPort™ 11SE with OCR  
dialling ...................................................63  
receive ..................................................47  
transmission ..........................................45  
Memory  
adding DIMM (option) .........................123  
installing ...........................................123  
storage ................................................193  
Menu Table ................................... 193, 195  
using menu keys .................................193  
Mode, entering  
copy ......................................................86  
fax .........................................................38  
scan ........................................................9  
Multi-line connections (PBX) ....................59  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM and Help in the  
PaperPort™ 11SE application to access  
How-to-Guides.  
PC Fax  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
PictBridge  
DPOF printing ....................................... 96  
specification ........................................ 223  
240  
Polling  
polled transmit ......................................80  
R
polling receive .......................................79  
sequential polling ..................................80  
Power failure ..........................................193  
Print  
difficulties ................................... 125, 129  
drivers .................................................221  
fax from memory ...................................51  
paper jams ..........................................150  
quality ........................................ 131, 134  
reports ...................................................83  
resolution ............................................221  
specifications ......................................221  
Printing  
Redial/Pause key .................................... 64  
Reducing  
copies ................................................... 87  
incoming faxes ..................................... 50  
Remote retrieval ...................................... 75  
access code ................................... 75, 76  
commands ............................................ 78  
getting your faxes ................................. 76  
Remote setup  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Replacing  
belt unit ............................................... 177  
drum units .......................................... 173  
toner cartridge .................................... 168  
waste toner box .................................. 181  
Reports ..............................................82, 83  
Fax Journal .......................................... 83  
journal period .................................... 83  
Help List ............................................... 83  
how to print ........................................... 84  
Network Configuration .......................... 83  
Tel Index List ........................................ 83  
Transmission Verification ..................... 82  
User Settings ........................................ 83  
Resolution  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Programming your machine ...................193  
Q
G
Quality  
copying .......................................... 88, 89  
printing ....................................... 131, 134  
Quick dial .................................................65  
broadcasting .........................................39  
using groups ......................................39  
group dial  
changing ............................................68  
setting up groups for broadcasting ....69  
one touch dial  
changing ............................................68  
custom scan profile ............................65  
setting up ...........................................65  
using ..................................................63  
search ...................................................63  
speed dial  
copy .................................................... 219  
fax (standard, fine, superfine,  
photo) ...........................................42, 218  
print .................................................... 221  
scan .................................................... 220  
setting for next fax ................................ 42  
Resolution key ..................................... 8, 42  
Restricted users ...................................... 31  
Ring delay, setting ................................... 48  
changing ............................................68  
custom scan profile ............................66  
setting up ...........................................66  
using ..................................................63  
241  
Troubleshooting ..................................... 125  
document jam ..................................... 149  
error messages on LCD ..................... 142  
If you are having difficulty  
receiving faxes ................................ 126  
if you are having difficulty  
S
Scanner glass  
faxing ....................................................38  
using .....................................................23  
Scanning  
copy quality ..................................... 129  
incoming calls .................................. 128  
network ............................................ 131  
paper handling ................................ 130  
print quality ..............................131, 134  
printing ....................................125, 129  
scanning .......................................... 130  
sending faxes .................................. 128  
software ........................................... 130  
telephone line .................................. 141  
maintenance messages on LCD ........ 142  
paper jam ........................................... 150  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Secure key .................................................8  
Security  
Memory Security ...................................32  
restricting dialling ..................................35  
Secure function lock  
administrator password ......................29  
Public user mode ...............................30  
restricted users ..................................31  
Setting lock ...........................................34  
Serial number  
how to find...............See inside front cover  
Shipping the machine ............................188  
Sleep time ................................................26  
Sort ..........................................................89  
Speed dial  
changing ...............................................68  
setting up ..............................................66  
using .....................................................63  
Status LED ...............................................10  
V
Volume, setting  
beeper .................................................. 25  
ring ....................................................... 25  
speaker ................................................. 25  
W
Waste toner box  
T
replacing ............................................. 181  
Windows®  
TAD (telephone answering device),  
See Software User’s Guide on the  
CD-ROM.  
Wireless Network  
See Quick Setup Guide and Network  
User’s Guide on the CD-ROM.  
external ....................................................47  
connecting ...................................... 58, 59  
recording OGM .....................................59  
Telephone line  
connections ...........................................59  
difficulties ............................................126  
interference .........................................141  
multi-line (PBX) .....................................59  
Temporary copy settings ..........................87  
Text, entering .........................................213  
Toner Save ..............................................26  
242  
For Australia Only:  
Warranty & Repair – For details about warranty on your Brother Product, the details are listed on  
the following link: www.brother.com.au under Warranty. For warranty service (repair) of your  
Brother product you will need to retain a copy of your sales docket and contact the Support Centre  
for location of the nearest Authorised Warranty Centre (AWC)  
Support – For technical support for your Brother Product other than what you can resolve through  
the User’s Guide, please visit our website or our solutions website for FAQs/Troubleshooting,  
Drivers & Software, or contact the Product Support Centre for any technical or customer  
care/support enquiry.  
Product Support Centre: Australia  
Brother International (Aust) Pty Ltd  
Phone:  
02 8875 6000  
Fax:  
02 9870 7223  
Email:  
productsupport@brother.com.au  
www.brother.com.au  
http://solutions.brother.com/  
Web Site:  
Solutions Site:  
Our Technical Support Consultants are available 5 days a week by phone during the hours of  
8.30am to 5.00pm Monday to Friday.  
For New Zealand Only:  
To contact Brother International (NZ) Limited for support with a Brother product please use the  
following methods.  
Phone:  
Premium End User Assistance  
Auto Attendant Self Help  
0900 552 152  
0800 652 152  
0800 632 467  
Brother Recycle Assistance  
Fax Assistance  
0800 837 822  
Email Assistance  
Please visit www.brother.co.nz and submit a helpdesk enquiry from  
Online Help  
Web Assistance  
Please visit www.brother.co.nz under Online Help for Frequently  
Asked Questions, Driver downloads, Warranty information and  
Service Centres  
Our Technical Support Consultants are available 7 days a week by phone during the hours of  
8.30am to 5pm Monday to Friday and 9am to 5pm Saturday and Sunday.  
Outside of these hours you can find assistance from our Auto Attendant Self Help and our Website  
www.brother.co.nz under Online Help.  
The machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only, local Brother companies or their  
dealers will only support machines purchased in their own countries.  

Brookstone Mobile 2600 mAh Power Charger 802217 User Manual
Brookstone Mobile 2600 mAh Power Charger 802236 User Manual
Dell All in One Wireless Printer P513w User Manual
Friedrich PE12R__B User Manual
Goodman Mfg ARUF363616CA User Manual
Haier Air Conditioner CWH24A User Manual
Haier AU162AFNAA User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools 98239 User Manual
Harmar Mobility AL001 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard F300 User Manual